Release Stamp DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE …...DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM Doc No: RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev. 04 2 SPF-001 (Rev.D1) 14. Distribution Name Organization ATKINS, LARRY

1 SPF-001 (Rev.D1)

DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORMPrepared For the U.S. Department of Energy, Assistant Secretary for Environmental ManagementBy Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC., PO Box 850, Richland, WA 99352Contractor For U.S. Department of Energy, Office of River Protection, under Contract DE-AC27-08RV14800

TRADEMARK DISCLAIMER: Reference herein to any specific commercial product, process, or service by trade name, trademark, manufacturer, or otherwise, does not necessarily constitute or imply its endorsement, recommendation, or favoring by the United States government or any agency thereof or its contractors or subcontractors. Printed in the United States of America.

Release Stamp

1. Doc No: RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev. 04

2. Title:Construction Specification for A/AX-Farm Waste Retrieval Project

3. Project Number:T2R02

☐ N/A 4. Design Verification Required:

☐ Yes ☒ No

5. USQ Number: ☒ N/A

N/A-8

6. PrHA Number Rev. ☐ N/A

PRHA-02038 00PRHA-02039 00PRHA-02040 00PRHA-02041 00PRHA-02042 00PRHA-02043 00PRHA-02044 00PRHA-02045 00PRHA-02046 00PRHA-02047 00

Clearance Review Restriction Type:public

7. Approvals

Title Name Signature Date

Clearance Review BRATTON, GAYLA E BRATTON, GAYLA E 03/30/2017

Design Authority SNYDER, JOSHUA J SNYDER, JOSHUA J 03/29/2017

Checker HAGENSEN, ALAN R HAGENSEN, ALAN R 03/06/2017

Document Control Approval WASHINGTON, MARGUERITE WASHINGTON, MARGUERITE 03/30/2017

Originator QUAM, PAUL R QUAM, PAUL R 03/03/2017

Other Approver CAMPBELL, RICHARD B CAMPBELL, RICHARD B 03/06/2017

Other Approver WITHERSPOON, JP P WITHERSPOON, JP P 03/25/2017

Other Approver BRYDEN, MICHAEL J BRYDEN, MICHAEL J 03/23/2017

Other Approver PARKMAN, DAVID B PARKMAN, DAVID B 03/28/2017

PrHA Lead SMITH, RYAN D SMITH, RYAN D 03/29/2017

Responsible Engineering Manager HANSON, CARL E HANSON, CARL E 03/29/2017

USQ Evaluator SMITH, RYAN D SMITH, RYAN D 03/29/2017

8. Description of Change and Justification

Problem: RPP-SPEC-60023 requires updating new A/AX Infrastructure designs.

Solution: Update RPP-SPEC-60023 from Revision 3 to Revision 4 to address necessary updates. See continuation page for a summary of the changes.

This revision does not change any requirements for safety significant systems.

9. TBDs or Holds ☒ N/A

10. Related Structures, Systems, and Components

a. Related Building/Facilities ☐ N/A b. Related Systems ☐ N/A c. Related Equipment ID Nos. (EIN) ☐ N/A

241-A

241-A-285

241-AX

241-EDS

241-PA

241-RC

241-RW241-WT

A285-RW-BFP-001

11. Impacted Documents – Engineering ☒ N/A

Document Number Rev. Title

12. Impacted Documents (Outside SPF):

N/A

13. Related Documents ☐ N/A

Document Number Rev. Title

58776-005-RFI-006 00 RFI - Lead Times: Aloyco Valves (Eng Review Nec, RPP-SPEC-60023 R3, DCN-TBD & Clarif Only)

DCN-713162 00 Change Valve from Aloyco to Powell for A285 Water System

RPP-CALC-60167 01 241-AX Farm Buried & Above Grade Water and Chemical Piping ASME B31.3 and B31.9 Analysis

RPP-CALC-60217 00 241-A-285 Air and Water Service Building ASME Piping Analysis

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 1 of 315

Mar 30, 2017

DATE:

DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM Doc No: RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev. 04

2 SPF-001 (Rev.D1)

14. Distribution

Name Organization

ATKINS, LARRY B CONSTRUCTION & COMMISSIONING

BRYDEN, MICHAEL J C-FARM RETRIEVAL ENGRNG

COOK, SHAUN M

DEBUIGNE, PAUL B A/AX RETRIEVAL ENGRNG

HOPKINS, GARY P R&C CONSTRUCTION

HULL, KEVIN J ELECTRICAL/AREA/242A-EVAP ENG

PARKMAN, DAVID B MARS-BASED RETRIEVAL ENGRNG

SPOONER, TRACY L CONSTRUCTION & COMMISSIONING

STEPHENS, RANDALL F

WHITE, JEREMEY C PROJECTS WORK PACKAGE PLANNING

WIKSTRAND, CHRIS B CONSTRUCTION & COMMISSIONING

WITHERSPOON, JP P A/AX RETRIEVAL ENGRNG

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 2 of 315

CONTINUATION SHEET

Continuation of block 7 from sheet 1:

Update Sections 40 05 13, 40 41 00, and 40 42 00 with changes per new design of above grade piping and pipe spools.

Update Section 40 05 13 per RFI 61800-000-RFI-029 to call out ASTM A403 fittings for 6 inch and larger.

Update Section 40 05 22 (HIHTL System Installation) to add reference to RPP-14859 and remove coating requirements from Section 2.2.D and heat tracing from what was Section 2.2.F. Also clarified Paragraphs 3.2.A & K, 3.3.C, and 3.4.5(now 4) and deleted Paragraph 3.4.A.4.

Add new Section 40 24 10 Chemical Piping to support fabrication of the A/AX Chemical Addition System (as depicted on H¬-14-022209, H-14-110574, etc).

Changes for option of installing RNC conduit in Electrical sections:Revised Section 26 05 19 to add information for using mechanical tugger. Also update Paragraph 3.3.D to include stranded wire and deleted Paragraphs 3.8.B and 3.8.C.2.b.

Revised Section 26 05 26 Paragraph 2.3.B to include stranded wire.

Revised Section 26 05 33 Paragraph 1.2 to revise title of NEMA TC 2 and to add NEMA TC 6 & 8, NEMA TC 7, NEMA TC 9, and UL 651A.

Revised Section 26 05 33 Paragraph 2.4 to remove subsection “D”.

Revised Section 26 05 33 Paragraph 2.5.A to add UL 651A, NEMA TC 3, NEMA TC 6 & 8, and NEMA TC 7.

Revised Section 26 05 33 Paragraph 2.5.B to remove UL 514C and add UL 651 and NEMA TC 9.

Revised Section 26 05 33 Paragraph 2.16.G.2.b to Tier 22.

Revised Section 26 05 33 to add new Paragraphs to 3.4 “Outdoors – underground not in Tank Farm” and “Indoors – exposed outside of designated electrical rooms”.

Revised Section 26 05 33 Paragraph 3.4.4(now 5).a to add “or RNC type EB”.

Revised Section 26 05 33 Paragraph 3.4.4(now 5).b to add “or RNC type DB or EB” and to change to “0 in. below the bottom of the concrete slab”.

Removed Section 26 05 33 Paragraph 3.4.I.M. “Do not use RNC 90 degree elbows large thatn 2 in. trade size; use plastic-coatedRMC, tape-wrappped RMC.”

Revised Section 26 05 33 Paragraph 3.6.A.3 to locate thermostats 60” high.

Revised Section 26 05 53 Paragraph 3.9.A to delete 12” minimum requirement.

Revised Section 26 10 00 Paragraph 1.2.F to remove superceded document FS W-C-1094.

Revised Section 26 10 00 Paragraph 1.2 to add New G Title “Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)”.

Revised Section 26 10 00 Paragraph 1.2.H(now I) to add NEMA TC 2, NEMA TC 3, NEMA TC 6 & 8, NEMA TC 7 and NEMA TC 9.

Revised Section 26 10 00 Paragraph 1.2.J(now K) to revise title of UL 651, and add UL 514B, 514C, and 651A.

Revised Section 26 10 00 Paragraph 2.1.C.2 to remove superceded document FS W-C-1094, and add NEMA TC 9, UL 514B, 514C, 651 and 651A.

Revised Section 26 10 00 Paragraph 2.1.C.3 to read “Type DB PVC RNC EPC 40 (Schedule 40) & EPC 80 (Schedule 80), NEMA TC 6 & 8, UL 514B, UL 514C, UL 651, UL 651A.”

Added Section 26 10 00 Paragraph 2.1.C.4 “Type HDPE RNC EPEC NEMA TC 7, UL 514B, UL 514C, UL 651, UL 651A”.

Revised Section 26 22 13 Paragraph 3.1.B to delete “Clean and repair existing dry-type transformers that are to remain.”

Revised Section 26 24 16 Paragraph 1.6 to not require multiple keys or extra touch up paint.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 3 of 315

A-6002-767 (REV 3)

RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 4

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION FOR A/AX-FARMS WASTE RETRIEVAL PROJECT

Author Name:

PR Quam

Prepared by ARES Corporation for Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC

Richland, WA 99352 U.S. Department of Energy Contract DE-AC27-08RV14800

EDT/ECN: DRCF UC: N/A

Cost Center: N/A Charge Code:

B&R Code: N/A Total Pages: See page count

Key Words: 241-AX, 241-A, Construction, Specification, single-shell tank, retrieval, testing, inspection,

equipment

Abstract: This specification provides the technical requirements for fabrication, materials, installation,

inspection, testing, and handling for equipment and systems required for A/AX-Farms single-shell tank

waste retrieval.

TRADEMARK DISCLAIMER. Reference herein to any specific commercial product, process, or service by trade name, trademark, manufacturer, or otherwise, does not necessarily constitute or imply its endorsement, recommendation, or favoring by the United States Government or any agency thereof or its contractors or subcontractors.

Release Approval Date Release Stamp

Approved For Public Release

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 4 of 315

By G. E. Bratton at 8:39 am, Mar 30, 2017

Mar 30, 2017

DATE:


CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION FOR

A/AX-FARMS WASTE RETRIEVAL PROJECT

March 2017

prepared by

ARES Corporation

Energy Services Division

1100 Jadwin Avenue, Suite 400

Richland, Washington 99352

(509) 946-3300

prepared for

Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 5 of 315


ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section No. of

Pages

Title Pages 2

Table of Contents 2

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Division 01 Sections are under separate cover – see WRPS Statement of Work (SOW)

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

Section 02 41 00 Demolition 3

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

Section 03 15 00 Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts 3

Section 03 30 00 Concrete 17

DIVISION 05 – METALS

Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 7

Section 05 53 00 Metal Gratings 5

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

Section 06 10 00 Carpentry 10

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 5

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

Section 09 91 00 Painting 6

Section 09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings 7

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Section 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems 39

Section 13 47 13.13 Cathodic Protection for Underground and Submerged Piping 9

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

Section 22 15 00 Compressed Air Piping 10

DIVISION 23 – HVAC

Section 23 31 01 Tank Ventilation Ducting 3

Section 23 31 13 Air Compressor Metal Ducts 4

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 6 of 315


iii

Section No. of

Pages

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 15

Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 9

Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 6

Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 13

Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 8

Section 26 10 00 Medium Voltage Electrical Distribution 12

Section 26 22 13 Low Voltage Distribution Transformers 5

Section 26 24 13 Switchboards 4

Section 26 24 16 Panelboards 5

Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 5

Section 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 4

Section 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 3

Section 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting 6

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 23 00 Excavation and Fill 17

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

Section 33 10 00 Water Utilities 15

DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION

Section 40 05 13 Process Piping 17

Section 40 05 22 Hose-in-Hose Transfer Line System Installation 8

Section 40 24 10 Chemical Piping 15

Section 40 41 00 Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing 5

Section 40 42 00 Process Piping and Equipment Insulation 7

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 7 of 315

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 8 of 315


02 41 00 – 1

SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the

extent designated in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date

of this Section unless otherwise indicated.

A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

29 CFR Part 1910.94 Occupational Health and Environmental Control,

Subpart G, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational

Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

29 CFR Part 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

B. Hanford Documents

TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 Implementation of DOE-0344, Excavating,

Trenching, and Shoring

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 70, 2014®1

National Electrical Code®1

(NEC

®1)

NFPA 70E®1

Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

D. Washington Administrative Code (WAC)

Title 173, Department of Ecology, Chapter 173-303, Dangerous Waste

Regulations.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Not Used.

1 NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, NEC, and NFPA 70E are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection

Association, Quincy, Massachusetts.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 9 of 315


02 41 00 – 2

1.3 PERMITS

A. Permits are addressed by TOC work control process.

1. Deleted.

2. Deleted.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before beginning cutting or demolition, survey existing work and examine the

Drawings and Specifications to determine extent of work. Coordinate work of

this Section with other work.

B. Determine if any type of chemicals, gases, flammable materials, or other

dangerous materials have been used in pipes or other equipment based on job

hazard evaluation or Excavation Permit. Control hazards associated with these

materials prior to demolition per the work control process.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Personnel Protection: Provide safeguards, including warning signs, barricades,

and temporary closures required for protection of construction personnel and

others during demolition and removal operations.

B. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded as a result of cutting, removal,

or demolition. Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required.

C. Disconnect existing utility services specified by Washington River Protection

Solutions (WRPS) Engineering Change Notice (ECN) or Mission Support

Alliance Engineering Change Request (ECR). If no direction is included in an

ECN or ECR, proceed as directed by the work control process.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. Control amount of dust resulting from demolition to prevent spread of dust and to

avoid creation of dust in surrounding area. Do not use water if ice, flooding, or

pollution could occur. Follow requirements of state Waste Discharge Permit

ST4511.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 10 of 315


02 41 00 – 3

B. Demolition Operations.

1. Remove equipment from tanks in accordance with applicable Work

Packages, ECNs, and required work controls, such as Radiological Work

Permit (RWP).

2. Dispose of debris in accordance with Contract Statement of Work

requirements.

END OF SECTION 02 41 00

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 11 of 315


03 15 00 – 1

SECTION 03 15 00

POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHOR BOLTS

PART 1 GENERAL







A. Hanford Documents

TFC-ENG-STD-06 Design Loads for Tank Farm Facilities

B. International Code Council (ICC)

ESR-1917 Hilti®2 Kwik Bolt TZ Carbon and Stainless Steel

Anchors in Concrete

ESR-1546 Hilti HDA Carbon Steel and Stainless Steel

Undercut Anchors for Cracked and Uncracked

Concrete

IBC International Building Code

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.

B. Approval Required

1. Training Records (Paragraph 1.3.A): 5 days before installation.

2. Special Inspection Qualifications (Paragraph 1.3.C): 5 days before start of

installation.

3. Deleted.

C. Deleted.

1. Deleted.

2 Hilti is a registered trademark of Hilti Corporation, Schaan, Liechtenstein.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 12 of 315


03 15 00 – 2

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor shall train post-installed anchor installers. Installers shall be trained to

the anchor manufacturer’s installation instructions, design document

requirements, and the anchor installation report. Contractor shall deliver installer

training records to the Company.

B. Misrepresented Products: See the Contract Statement of Work for required

measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

C. Post-Installed Anchor Special Inspector Qualifications.

1. Two years’ experience in concrete inspection and/or certification from

American Concrete Institute, ICC, International Conference of Building

Officials, or other recognized concrete inspection agency to be provided

by the Tank Operations Contractor (TOC).

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. See Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES

A. See Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Post-installed anchors (PC-2, PC-1, and PC-0): Industry standard wedge-type

having a published evaluation report (by ICC Evaluation Services, Inc.), with

anchor descriptions, tables of allowable tension and shear loads (including

seismic and wind qualifications), and test findings.

B. Hilti Corporation or approved equal:

1. Kwik Bolt TZ Expansion Anchor.

2. HDA Metric Undercut Anchor.

C. Anchors located in dry, interior locations may be carbon steel. Anchors located in

wet or potentially wet interior locations (e.g., water building installations) and

exterior locations shall be stainless steel.

D. Anchorage must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 13 of 315


03 15 00 – 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where expansion anchors are to be installed and notify the

Company, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion

of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. For expansion anchors larger than 3/8 in., locate rebar by scanning before drilling.

For expansion anchors 3/8 in. or smaller, avoid cutting rebar by using a drill with

a concealed-metal detector shutoff.

B. Do not install anchors in concrete prior to 28 days after concrete placement unless

it can be shown by testing that the concrete design strength has been obtained.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Expansion Anchor Installation

1. Install anchors shown on the Drawings in accordance with training.

2. Notify the TOC Construction Representative if reinforcing steel is

encountered when drilling.

3.4 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

A. Special Inspection is required for all anchor bolt installations. This shall be done

in accordance with Section 4 of the applicable ICC Evaluation Report. The

special inspector shall be on the jobsite during anchor installation to verify anchor

type, anchor dimensions, hole dimensions, hole cleaning procedures, anchor

spacing, edge distances, drill bit size, anchor embedment and tightening torque.

Complete inspections shall be documented by the inspector on Expansion Anchor

Installation Report (Form A-6004-239) (or Company-approved equivalent) and

documented in the work package.

B. Installation Reports (Paragraph 3.4.A): Within 10 days after work is complete

(Expansion Anchor Installation Report [Form A-6004-239]).


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 14 of 315


03 30 00 – 1

SECTION 03 30 00

CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Formwork.

B. Reinforcement.

C. Cast-In-Place Items.

D. Mixture Design.

E. Placement Procedures.

F. Cast-in-Place Concrete.

G. Pre-Cast Concrete.

H. Finishes for pre-engineered metal buildings.

I. Concrete Test Cylinders.

J. Grout Test Blocks.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 53 00, “Metal Gratings.”

B. Section 09 96 00, “High-Performance Coatings.”

C. Section 13 34 19, “Metal Building Systems.”

D. Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS, CODES, AND STANDARDS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division

01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.




RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 15 of 315


03 30 00 – 2

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

ACI 117 Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials

ACI 237R Self-Consolidating Concrete

ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings

ACI 305R Guide to Hot Weather Concreting

ACI 306.1 Standard Specification for Cold Weather

Concreting

ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete

ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement

ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural

Concrete and Commentary

ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork

ACI CP-1 Technical Workbook for ACI Certification of

Concrete Field Testing Technician-Grade 1

B. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A108 Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and

Alloy, Cold-Finished

ASTM A185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain

Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A853 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Carbon, for

General Use

ASTM C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete

Test Specimens in the Field

ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 16 of 315


03 30 00 – 3

ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic

Cement Concrete

ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM C172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed

Concrete

ASTM C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly

Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method

ASTM C260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining

Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C404 Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry

Grout

ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry

ASTM C1077 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete

and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction

and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation

ASTM C1093 Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing

Agencies for Masonry

ASTM C1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,

Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

ASTM D1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion

Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural

Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient

Bituminous Types)

ASTM F593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts,

Hex Cap Screws, and Studs

ASTM F594 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts

C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)

Manual of Standard Practice

D. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA)

QC Manual – Section 3 Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production

Facilities

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 17 of 315


03 30 00 – 4

E. American Welding Society (AWS)

AWS D1.1, 2010 Structural Welding Code-Steel

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Contract Statement of Work for submittal procedures.

B. Approval Required.

1. Concrete Data: Before mixing, submit concrete materials, mix design, and

mix proportions, in accordance with ACI 301. Identify each material to be

used in concrete, including amount, by weight, to be utilized in each cubic

yard of plastic mix.

2. Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Prior to fabrication of reinforcement,

submit placement drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement. Include bars sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules,

stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps,

mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for

concrete reinforcement.

3. Setting drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions: Prior to

fabrication, submit information for installation of anchorages, such as

concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral

anchors, to be embedded in concrete.

4. Certificate of Compliance: Provide Certificate of Compliance for cast-in-

place anchors indicating they meet the requirements of this Specification.

5. Concrete Placement drawings: Prior to setting of forms, submit placement

drawings indicating planned placement sequence and locations of any

planned joints, including those not shown on the Contract drawings.

6. Concrete curing procedure: Before mixing, submit a description of

materials and methods of curing, in accordance with ACI 301, Section

5.3.6.

7. Cold Weather Concreting Procedures: Before placement and if concrete

will be placed during cold weather, submit procedures meeting

requirements of ACI 301, Sections 4.2.2.6 and 5.3.2.1.b, and ACI 306.1.

8. Hot Weather Concreting Procedures: Before placement and if concrete

will be placed during hot weather, submit procedures meeting

requirements of ACI 301, Sections 4.2.2.6 and 5.3.2.1.c, and ACI 305R.

9. Product data of non-shrink grout.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 18 of 315


03 30 00 – 5

10. Submittals shall include the documentation listed in Paragraph 1.5.

11. Self-Consolidating Grout Data: Before mixing, submit grout materials,

mix design, and mix proportions in accordance with ASTM C476.

Identify each material to be used in grout, including amount, by weight, to

be utilized in each cubic yard of plastic mix. Curing shall be performed in

accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.6.

C. Deleted.


A. Deleted.

B. Certification of Concrete Production Facility: The concrete supplier shall be

certified according to NRMCA’s “Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete

Production Facilities,” with compliance to ASTM C94 requirements for

production facilities and equipment.

C. Qualification of Concrete Inspection/Testing Laboratory: The laboratory

including equipment, personnel, and procedures shall meet the requirements of

ASTM C1077 and shall be currently accredited by an independently recognized

authority.

D. Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist (Attachment 1): The preplacement portion of

the Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist shall be signed off prior to any concrete

or grout placement. The Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist shall include

inspection of the following items prior to placing concrete or grout; forms, re-bar,

subgrade, embedments, and other items that may need inspection.

E. Trip Ticket: Document that comes with the concrete delivery that it meets

specifications. “Trip Tickets” shall contain information listed in ASTM C94,

Paragraphs 14.1.1 through 14.1.10, and water/cement ratio.

F. Deliverable Documentation: The following documents and records, required by

this Section, shall be delivered to Construction Document Control in accordance

with Contract Documents.

Document Paragraph

Supplier Certification 1.5.B

Laboratory Qualifications 1.5.C

Inspection Personnel Qualification Records 1.6.A

Concrete Test Results 3.7.D

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 19 of 315


03 30 00 – 6

Grout Test Results 3.7.F

G. Perform work in accordance with the applicable sections of ACI 117, ACI 301,

ACI 318, and ASTM C476.

H. Suspect and Misrepresented Products: See Contract Statement of Work for

required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

I. Trip Ticket: The Trip Ticket is provided with the concrete delivery and shall

contain information listed in ASTM C94, Paragraphs 14.1.1 through 14.1.10, and

water/cement ratio.

J. Qualification of Grout Inspection/Testing Laboratory: The laboratory including

equipment, personnel, and procedures shall meet the requirements of ASTM

C1093 and shall be currently accredited by an independently recognized

authority.

1.6 QUALIFICATION OF CONCRETE/GROUT INSPECTORS

A. Personnel performing field testing of concrete shall be ACI Concrete Field

Testing Technicians, Grade 1, who have received formal certification in

accordance with ACI CP-1 or equivalent. Equivalent certification programs shall

include requirements for written and performance examination as stipulated in

ACI 301, Section 1.6.2.

B. Deleted.


A. See the Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.

B. Steel reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent

bending and damage.

C. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture dirt, oil,

sunlight, and other contaminants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTION

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cast-In-Place Concrete

1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II (low alkali).

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 20 of 315


03 30 00 – 7

2. Aggregates: ASTM C33, 3/4-in. maximum size. Fine aggregate: free of

materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

3. Air-entraining admixture: ASTM C260.

4. Properties (if not specified by design):

a. Minimum allowable compressive strength: 4500 lb/in2 at 28 days,

or as required by design documents.

b. Slump: In accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.2.2.

c. Air content: In accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.2.4.

d. Proportions: In accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.3, and

ASTM C94.

e. Time of discharge: In accordance with ASTM C94, Section 12

and ACI 301, Section 4.1.2.10.

5. Measuring, Mixing, and Delivery: In accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Pre-Cast Concrete

1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II (low alkali).

2. Aggregates: ASTM C33, 3/4-in. maximum size. Fine aggregate: free of

materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

3. Air-entraining admixture: ASTM C260.


a. Minimum allowable compressive strength: 4,500 lb/in2 at 28 days,

or as required by design documents.

b. Slump: In accordance with ACI 237R.

c. Air content: In accordance with ACI 237R.

d. Proportions: In accordance with ACI 237R, and ASTM C94.

e. Time of discharge: In accordance with ASTM C94, Section 12

and ACI 237R.

5. Measuring, Mixing, and Delivery: In accordance with ASTM C94.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 21 of 315


03 30 00 – 8

C. Controlled Density Fill (CDF): Portland cement based, minimum compressive

strength of 100 psi at 28 days, maximum compressive strength of 300 psi at 28

days.

D. Reinforcing Steel

1. Steel bars: ASTM A615, deformed, Grade 60.

2. Tie wire: ASTM A853 carbon steel, 16-gage minimum, annealed.

3. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 plain type in flat sheets.

E. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length

with ends square and free of burrs.

F. Non-shrink Grout

1. In accordance with ASTM C1107.

2. Minimum strength of fluid grout, 4,000 psi at 1 day, 5,000 psi at 3 days,

and 9,000 psi at 28 days.

G. Embedded Plates: See Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

H. Headed Weld Stud Anchors: ASTM A108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-

stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

I. Cast-In-Place Anchors: ASTM F593 CW2 threaded rods with ASTM F594 nuts.

J. Post-Installed Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor

Bolts.”

K. Expansion joint filler: ASTM D1751; asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt,

1/2-in. thick.

L. Joint sealants: See Section 07 92 00, “Joint Sealants.”

M. Forms: Wood, steel, plywood or Masonite Corporation “Concrete Form

Presdwood,” as required for various specified finishes.

1. Form facing panels shall provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete

surfaces.

2. Form release agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will

not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not

impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

N. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion appropriate for bonding fresh concrete

to existing set concrete.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 22 of 315


03 30 00 – 9

O. Special Coatings: See Section 09 96 00, “High-Performance Coatings,” for

concrete coating. Extent of coating shall be as shown on Drawings.

P. Waterstops: Self-expanding Butyl Strip, manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal

strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for

adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 in.

Q. Self-Consolidating Grout for use in Grout Boxes

1. In accordance with ASTM C476.

2. Aggregate: ASTM C404, Fine, Size No. 2, Natural or Manufactured.


a. Minimum strength of grout, 3,000 psi at 28 days.

b. Maximum unit weight of grout, 140 pcf (Ref. RPP-CALC-61007).

2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Form Construction

1. Install formwork in accordance with ACI 301, Section 2.3 to support

vertical, lateral, and construction loads that might be applied, until

structure can support such loads.

2. Construct formwork such that interior shape and rigidity of finished

concrete will meet requirements of the Drawings and approved shop

drawings within tolerances specified in ACI 117, Section 4.

3. Prepare form surfaces in accordance with ACI 301, Section 2 using

specified form coating materials, or as described below.

4. Forms for surfaces which will be permanently concealed from view may

be saturated with water, before placing concrete, instead of other

treatment. In freezing weather, forms shall be treated with oil or stearate.

5. Clean forms of foreign material before placing concrete.

B. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of

anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having

integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 23 of 315


03 30 00 – 10

C. Clean grout boxes of foreign material and remove free liquids within grout box

prior to placement of contaminated equipment. Maintain cleanliness until self-

consolidating grout placement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of

anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items

having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete.

B. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items as required for

adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. All

embedded items shall be securely supported to prevent displacement during

concrete placement and finishing.

C. Verify that anchors, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete

are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing

concrete. Document inspection on Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Reinforcing Steel

1. Fabricate and place bars to dimensions shown on Contract drawings,

within tolerances shown in ACI 117, Sections 2.1 and 2.2.

2. Place as shown on Drawings, within tolerances specified in ACI 117,

Section 2.2 and ACI 301, Section 3.3.2.

3. Tie to prevent displacement during placement of concrete.

4. Do not force into concrete after initial set has started.

5. Provide concrete cover for reinforcement protection per dimensions given

in ACI 301, Section 3.3, except where shown otherwise on Contract

drawings or approved shop drawings.

6. Reinforcement shall be supported and fastened together to prevent

displacement by construction loads, or placement of concrete beyond

specified tolerances. Reinforcement supported from ground shall rest on

precast, square concrete blocks, with a minimum surface area of 4 in2 and

having a compressive strength equal to specified compressive strength of

concrete being placed.

B. Concrete

1. Concrete Placing:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 24 of 315


03 30 00 – 11

a. Contractor shall use a Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist.

Checklist shall be reviewed with the TOC Construction

Representative prior to placing concrete. At a minimum, the

checklist shall include:

i. Formwork placement.

ii. Earth compaction.

iii. Reinforcement placement.

iv. Embedded items.

v. Bonding electrode.

vi. Concrete Mix.

vii. Testing Requirements.

viii. Weather conditions including proper weather mitigation

requirements.

ix. Approval of all preplacement submittals prior to placment.

x. Availability of associated materials and labor.

xi. Identification of sections of structure to be placed.

Note: Use separate checklist for each day and each concrete mix.

b. Verify that anchors, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be

cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and

will not cause hardship in placing concrete, and that required

inspections have been performed. Document inspection on a

Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist.

c. Deleted.

d. For each truck load, collect Trip Ticket.

e. Discharge concrete rinsate at Company-approved location.

f. Place in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3. Do not drop more

than 5 ft.

g. Temper only as permitted in ACI 301, Section 4.3.

2. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project

site, subject to limitations of ACI 301, Section 4.3.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 25 of 315


03 30 00 – 12

a. Addition of water shall be in accordance with ASTM C94.

b. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range, water-

reducing admixtures to mixture.

3. Before test sampling and placing concrete, trip ticket shall be reviewed by

the Testing Agency’s field inspector. After depositing concrete, trip ticket

shall be retained in the work package or fabrication plan.

4. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 and as

follows.

a. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength

that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low

temperatures.

b. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below

40°F, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the

temperature range required by ACI 301.

c. Do not use frozen materials containing ice or snow. Do not place

concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen

materials.

5. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305R and as

follows:

a. Maintain concrete temperature below 90°F at time of placement.

Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control

temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total

amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is

Contractor’s option.

b. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before

placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing

water, soft spots, or dry areas.

6. Place nonshrink grout where shown on Contract drawings, in accordance

with manufacturer’s recommendations.

7. Placing concrete against subgrade/base material: Place on or against firm,

damp surfaces free of frost, ice, and free water. Obtain required earth

compaction in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill,”

before concrete placement. Dampen earth surfaces to receive fresh

concrete.

8. Consolidation: Consolidate concrete in accordance with ACI 301,

Section 5.3.2.5.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 26 of 315


03 30 00 – 13

a. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is

thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded

items and into corners.

b. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete

placement.

c. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct

elevations.

d. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains/trenches where required.

9. Form Removal and Concrete Repair

a. Form removal: Remove in accordance with ACI 301, Sections

2.3.2 and 2.3.4.

b. Cut back form ties and examine concrete surfaces for defects.

Repair only after permission for patching is given by the TOC

Construction Representative.

c. Place concrete repair mortar within 1 hour after mixing. Do not re-

temper mortar.

d. Repair surface defects in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.7.

Cure concrete repairs same as new concrete.

10. Concrete Finishes and Tolerances

a. Measuring for tolerances shall be performed in accordance with

ACI 301, Section 5.3.4.3.

b. Formed surfaces: Start finishing following concrete repair and

complete within 96 hours after forms have been removed. Finish

in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5.3.3.

i. Surfaces exposed to earth backfill; Rough form finish.

ii. Exterior surfaces exposed to weather.

iii. Repair and patch tie holes and defects.

iv. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified

limits on formed-surface irregularities.

v. Surfaces to receive special protective coating (ACI 301,

Section 5.3.3.4.b).

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 27 of 315


03 30 00 – 14

c. Unformed surfaces: Finish in accordance with

ACI 301, Section 5.3.4.

i. Exterior equipment slabs subject to foot traffic.

C. Self-Consolidating Grout for use in Grout Boxes to be placed in accordance with

ASTM C476, using the Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist.

3.4 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding,

re-straightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet

concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if

area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Re-straighten, cut down high

spots, and fill low spots.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate

concrete by hand- or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and re-

straighten until surface is free of trowel marks and is uniform in texture and

appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through

applied coatings.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps,

and elsewhere as indicated.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,

sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construction contraction joints for a

depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with

shatter-proof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-in. wide joints

into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise

damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

Maximum 12 hours after placement.

3.6 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive

cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather and ACI 301

for hot-weather protection during curing.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 28 of 315


03 30 00 – 15

B. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.6. Clear curing

compounds shall be tinted or applied to surfaces marked to show extent of

spraying.

C. Do not use curing compound on surfaces to receive special protective coating.

D. Protect concrete during adverse weather conditions in accordance with ACI 301,

Section 1.8.

E. Protect concrete from mechanical damage in accordance with ACI 301,

Section 1.8.

F. Making and curing of field test cylinders shall be performed in accordance with

ASTM C31. Test cylinders shall be stored in or on the structure as near to the

point of deposit of the concrete represented as possible. Protect all surfaces of the

test cylinders from the elements as near as possible the same way as the formed

work. Provide the test cylinders with the same temperature and moisture

environment as the structural work.


A. Sample and test concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Sections 1.6.4.2 (d), (e),

and (f), (g), and (h). Record results. Engage a qualified independent testing

agency to perform material evaluation tests.

B. Engage a special inspector and qualified independent testing agency to perform

field material evaluation tests and inspections, and prepare testing and inspection

reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Headed bolts and studs.

3. Verification of use of required concrete design mixture.

4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

D. Concrete Tests:

1. Testing of concrete samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained according

to ACI 301, Section 1.6.4.2.d and ASTM C172.

2. Testing shall be performed according to ACI 301, Sections 1.6.4.2.(e), (f),

(g), and (h). Record results.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 29 of 315


03 30 00 – 16

E. Provide nonshrink grout block molds onsite. Non-shrink grout blocks shall test

equal to or greater than minimum strength specified.

F. Provide self-consolidating grout block molds onsite. Self-consolidating grout

blocks shall test equal to or greater than minimum strength specified.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 30 of 315


03 30 00 – Att. 1-1

SECTION 03 30 00 – ATTACHMENT 1

CONCRETE/GROUT PLACEMENT CHECKLIST

Placement No.:

PART A – REQUIREMENTS

Project: Work Plan: Work Step: Planned Placement Date:

Total Cubic Yards:

Description of Placement:

Mix Design No.:

Psi Required: Aggregate Size: Prepared By/Date:

Testing Requirements: Bonding Agent:

Curing Compound:

PART B – PREPLACEMENT

Description: Craft Release

(Sign/Date):

QC Inspection

(Sign/Date):

Layout

Excavation/Compaction

Formwork (Material, Location, Alignment)

Testing Agency Notified and Scheduled

Embeds (Material, Location, Alignment,

Stability)

Reinforcement (Size, Quality, Bends, Lap,

Length, Spacing, Cover, Stability,

Cleanliness)

Joints (Materials, Location, Prep,

Dowel/Tie)

Piping

Electrical

Cleanup

Placing and Curing Equipment

Preplacement Submittals Approval

Weather/Temperature Considerations

Other

PART C – PLACEMENT

Placement Approved – Supt.:

Date: Placement Approved – TOC Representative:

Date:

Actual Placement Trip Ticket No.: Actual Cubic Yards Placed:

Date: Time:

Comments:

END OF ATTACHMENT 1

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 31 of 315


05 50 00 – 1

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL







A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

B&PVC, 2013 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

Section IX Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing

Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and

Brazing Operations

B. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)

ASNT SNT-TC-1A Personnel Qualifications and Certification in

Nondestructive Testing

C. ASTM International (ASTM)


ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and

Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A106 Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel

Pipe for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A240 Standard Specification for Chromium and

Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and

Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General

Applications

ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and

Shapes

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 32 of 315


05 50 00 – 2

ASTM A312 Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and

Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Pipes

ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel,

Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile

Strength

ASTM A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded

and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in

Rounds and Shapes

ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel

Nuts

ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated

(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A992 Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes

ASTM F844 Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain

(Flat), Unhardened for General Use

D. American Welding Society (AWS)

AWS D1.1, 2010 Structural Welding Code – Steel

AWS D1.3, 2008 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel

AWS D1.6, 2007 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel

AWS QC1 Certification of Welding Inspectors

E. Hanford Documents


TFC-ENG-STD-22 Piping, Jumpers, and Valves

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for submittal procedures.


1. Welding personnel qualifications: 5 days before start of fabrication,

submit welder qualification as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.1.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 33 of 315


05 50 00 – 3

2. Welding procedure qualifications: 5 days before first use, submit welding

procedures as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.1.

3. Examination personnel qualifications: 5 days before first use, submit

examination personnel qualification as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.2.

4. Examination procedures: 5 days before start of fabrication, submit

examination procedures as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.3.

5. Carbon Steel Weld Examination as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.1.

6. Sheet Steel Weld Examination as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.2.

7. Stainless Steel Weld Examination as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.3.

8. Weld Examinations (PT, MT) as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.4.

C. Approval Not Required: None.


A. Misrepresented Products: See the Contract Statement of Work for required


B. Qualifications of Welding Personnel and Procedures

1. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall be qualified in

accordance with AWS D1.1 for steel structures, AWS D1.3 for sheet steel,

and AWS D1.6 for stainless steel before welding. Qualification of

welding personnel and procedures in accordance with ASME B&PVC,

Section IX may be substituted for components welded in accordance with

AWS D1.1, D1.3, and D1.6. Maintain copy of welding procedure

specifications, procedure qualification records, and welder performance

qualification test results and renewal of qualification documentation at

jobsite. Where stainless steel materials are welded to carbon steel,

AWS D1.1 procedures shall govern, unless ASME B&PVC, Section IX

was substituted.

2. Qualification of examination personnel: Maintain copies of examination

personnel certifications and written examination performance procedures

at jobsite.

a. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified

Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification

(current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.

b. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE)

shall be certified in accordance with approved procedure, which

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 34 of 315


05 50 00 – 4

shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II

or III personnel to interpret results.

3. Examination procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance

with AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.6, as applicable, and this

Specification. Maintain copies of examination procedures at jobsite.

1.4 PERMITS


B. Deleted.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MATERIALS

Use the following materials unless otherwise shown on Contract drawings:

A. Rolled Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36 or ASTM A992, Gr. 50.

B. Stainless Steel Shapes and Bars: ASTM A276, Type 304L.

C. Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet: ASTM A240, Type 304, 304L.

D. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A312, Grade TP 304L (SMLS).

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 (black) Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A106 Grade B,

standard weight, Schedule 40.

F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.

G. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653

H. Fasteners

1. Bolts

a. ASTM A325.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 35 of 315


05 50 00 – 5

2. Nuts

a. ASTM A563, Grade C, plain, heavy hex.

3. Washers: ASTM F436 Type 1, plain.

4. Expansion Anchor Installations: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed

Concrete Anchor Bolts.”

5. Weld studs: Nelson Stud Welding Co. Type H4L or approved substitute.

I. Welding Electrodes/Filler Metal:

1. Carbon steel – Matching filler metal with Fu = 70,000 psi.

2. Stainless steel – E308/ER308 or E309/ER309.

J. Nonshrink Grout: See Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.”

K. Special Protective Coating: See Section 09 91 00, “Painting.”

L. Zinc-rich Coating: Sherwin Williams®3 “Zinc Clad®

3 200,” or ZRC Products

Company “Z.R.C.®4“

M. Supports: Channels, channel spring nuts, bolts, and fittings for any one support

type shall be galvanized and from the same manufacturer. Cooper B-Line®5

channels and fittings, or approved substitute.

1. Channels: 1 5/8-in. wide by 1 5/8-in. deep, or as shown on Drawings.

2. Channel spring nuts: Manufacturer’s standard.

3. Bolts (for use with channel spring nuts): Manufacturer’s standard.

4. Support Clamps (for rigid steel conduit): Manufacturer’s standard.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General

1. Verify measurements, including field measurements, before fabrication.

Provide miscellaneous bolts and anchors, supports, braces, and

connections necessary for completion of metal fabrications. Cut,

reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications shown to receive finish

hardware and similar items. Weld or bolt connections as shown on the

Drawings.

3 Sherwin-Williams and Zinc Clad are registered trademarks of Swimc, Inc., Newark, Delaware.

4 Z.R.C. is a registered trademark of Norfolk Corporation, Marshfield, Massachusetts.

5 B-Line is a registered trademark of Cooper Technologies Company, Houston, Texas.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 36 of 315


05 50 00 – 6

2. Perform welding of steel connections in accordance with AWS D1.1, sheet

steel in accordance with AWS D1.3, and stainless steel in accordance with

AWS D1.6.

B. Miscellaneous Steel Items: Supply required clips, frames, equipment supports,

and other fabrications not shown on the Drawings. Fabricate parts from standard

structural sections or shapes, to sizes required. Wherever miscellaneous parts are

exposed, grind edges, corners, and rough cuts smooth and free of snags. Shop

paint parts except those to be embedded in concrete, or those that require other

specific finishes.

C. Finishes

1. Prime ferrous metal in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting.” Do

not coat members to be embedded in concrete, surfaces and edges to be

field welded, or items to be galvanized. Shop paint may extend into

embedded areas where impractical to remove.

2. Touch up damaged zinc surfaces with zinc-rich coating. Apply in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where metal fabrications are to be installed and notify TOC

Construction Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and

timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of


having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete. Coordinate with TOC

Construction Representative for delivery of items to Site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Expansion Anchor Installation: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete

Anchor Bolts.”

B. Install metal fabrications plumb, level, or as shown on the Drawings.

C. Make field connections as neatly as possible with joints flush and smooth. Grind

smooth exposed field welds, as required per design, before field painting. Repair

welds in galvanized work with 2 coats of zinc-rich coating.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 37 of 315


05 50 00 – 7

D. Assemble and install interchangeable channel supports in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations. Torque bolts used with channel spring nuts in

support channels and clamps per manufacturer instructions (B-Line torque

requirements shown).

Bolt size, inches Torque, ft-lb 1/4 6 – 9

5/16 11 – 17

3/8 19 – 30

1/2 50 – 75

Unless specified on the design drawings, torque the bolts in accordance with Tank

Farm maintenance procedure 2-MISC-049 Bolt Torquing Guidelines.

E. Weld Studs: Installation, testing and welder qualification shall be in accordance

with the manufacturers’ written instructions, and AWS D1.1, Section 7 for carbon

steel and AWS D1.6, Section 7 for stainless steel.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. After installation has been completed, clean and paint connections with primer.

Touch-up shop prime coat wherever damaged. Repair breaks in galvanized

coating with zinc-rich coating.


A. Weld Examination

1. Perform visual examination of carbon steel welds in accordance with

AWS D1.1, Sections 6.5.5 and 6.9 (statically loaded structures). Record

examination results and include in work package or fabrication document

as applicable.

2. Perform visual examination for sheet steel in accordance with AWS D1.3,

Section 6.1. Record examination results and include in work package or

fabrication document as applicable.

3. Perform visual examination of stainless steel welds in accordance with

AWS D1.6, Section 6.28.1 (statically loaded structures). Record

examination results and include in work package or fabrication document

as applicable.

4. Perform magnetic particle examination (MT) where shown on the

Drawings in accordance with AWS D1.1, Sections 6.12 and 6.10,

respectively. Perform liquid penetrant (PT) examination where shown on

the Drawings in accordance with AWS D1.6, Section 6.28.4 (statically

loaded). Record examination results results and include in work package

or fabrication document as applicable.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 38 of 315


05 53 00 – 1

SECTION 05 53 00

METAL GRATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Section Includes:

1. Labor, materials, equipment as shown on the Drawings, and specified

herein, to furnish and install metal bar gratings.

1.2 REFERENCES






A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/National Association of

Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 Metal Bar Grating Manual

ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532 Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual

ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 Steel, Stainless Steel and Aluminum Gratings and

Stair Treads

B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)


ASTM A510 Standard Specification for General Requirements

for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon

Steel, and Alloy Steel




ASTM A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damages and

Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 39 of 315


05 53 00 – 2

ASTM A1011 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,

Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength

Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with

Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength

ASTM A1018 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,

Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,

Commercial, Drawing, Structural, High-Strength

Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with

Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength

ASTM B633 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited

Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

ASTM F1941 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited

Coatings on Threaded Fasteners [Unified Inch

Screw Threads (UN/UNR)]

C. Master Painters Institute (MPI)

Architectural Painting Specification Manual

D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

Paint Specification No. 20 Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, “Inorganic,” and

Type II,”Organic”)

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data for approval: For the following:

1. Manufacturer’s specifications, load tables, anchor details, and standard

installation details.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

Not used.


A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 and

ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532 (or ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531) or as specified in

design.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for additional general requirements.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 40 of 315


05 53 00 – 3

1.7 PERMITS


1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

Not used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled

content of steel products so post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-

consumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

Note: No documentation is required since the U.S. Green Building Council

allows a default value of 25 percent to be used for steel without documentation.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36.

C. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A36 or Steel Strip, ASTM A1011 or ASTM

A1018.

D. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510.

E. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011, Structural Steel, Grade 30.

F. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, Structural Quality, Grade 33, with G90

coating.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated by design, provide zinc-plated fasteners with

coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5. Fasteners

shall be self-drilling, self-tapping structural fasteners.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer5: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal

modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79 and compatible with topcoat.

Primer is not to be used for galvanized steel.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-

Paint 20.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 41 of 315


05 53 00 – 4

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease

edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 in. unless otherwise indicated by design.

Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that

needed to support indicated loads.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

2.5 METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. Welded Steel Grating:

1. Bearing Bar Spacing, Depth, and Thickness: As Shown.

2. Crossbar Spacing: As Shown.

3. Traffic Surface: Plain.

4. Loading: At a uniform load of 100 pounds per square foot, deflection

shall not exceed 1/4 in. over the required span.

5. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized.

B. Grating Sections: All grating shall be banded. Fabricate with banding bars

attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and

fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer

for attaching to supports.

C. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts

to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating grating.

1. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars

with bars of same size and material as bearing bars.

D. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. The finish galvanizing of gratings, frames, and supports shall be applied after the

required fabrication of assembly is complete.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 42 of 315


05 53 00 – 5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The grating shall be received at the job site by the Contractor, unloaded, and

protected from damage prior to the requirement for it to be installed.

B. Cutting, fitting, and placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting as required

for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;

measured from established lines and levels.

C. Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating

standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation

clearances and standard anchoring details.

D. All grating shall be removable. Attach removable units to supporting members

with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated.

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas

and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 43 of 315


06 10 00 – 1

SECTION 06 10 00

CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Material and fabrication requirements for temporary work platforms for use in

Tank Farms.








ASME B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws – Inch Series

ASME B18.6.1 Wood Screws (Inch Series)



Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip)

on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and

Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength


Nuts

ASTM D5055 Standard Specification for Establishing and

Monitoring Structural Capacities of Prefabricated

Wood I-Joists

ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 44 of 315


06 10 00 – 2

ASTM F1667 Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails,

Spikes, and Staples

C. APA-The Engineered Wood Association

Engineered Wood Construction Guide

D. Hanford Documents

DOE/RL-92-36 Hanford Site Hoisting and Rigging Manual

RPP-RPT-47003 Temporary Structures Wind Tie-Down Guide

E. International Code Council (ICC)

IBC Table 1607.1 and Chapter 23, Wood

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Not Used.


A. Deliver products bundled or crated to provide adequate protection during transit

and job storage, with required grade marks clearly identifiable. Inspect wood

products for damage upon delivery. Remove and replace damaged materials.

B. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp

or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air

circulation within and around stacks, and under temporary coverings.

C. Protect sheet materials during handling to prevent breaking of corners and

damage to surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER

A. Lumber shall consist of Douglas fir No. 2 (or better) structural joists and planks.

B. Lumber shall be exterior type for use in exterior locations.

C. All wood shall be fire-retardant-treated per IBC, Section 2303.2 or shall be treated

with post treatment, exterior, clear drying, Class A fire retardant.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 45 of 315


06 10 00 – 3

2.2 FASTENERS

A. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated (Paragraph 3.1.D) that comply with

requirements specified in this specification or manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Provide fasteners with hot-dip, zinc-coating per ASTM A153.

C. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A, with ASTM A563 hex

nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Metal framing fittings: Simpson Strong-Tie®6 or similar. Fittings shall have a

minimum G90 zinc galvanized coating.

H. Post bases: Simpson Strong-Tie AB/ABA/ABE/ABU Adjustable and Standoff

Post Bases or similar. Post bases shall have a minimum G90 zinc galvanized

coating.

2.3 PLATFORM GRATING AND STAIR TREADS

A. Platform decking and stair treads shall be pultruded fiberglass reinforced plastic

(FRP) with slip resistant walking surface, size I-6010 minimum. Color shall be

gray or yellow.

B. FRP grating and stair treads shall be flame retardant in accordance ASTM E84

with a Class 1 flame spread index of less than 25.

C. Clips shall be stainless steel and of appropriate type for use with pultruded FRP

grating and stair treads.

2.4 PIPE

A. Pipe shall be ASTM A53, Grade B.

2.5 CONCRETE BLOCKS

A. Concrete blocks in this section must meet the requirements of DOE/RL-92-36.

B. Pier blocks shall be standard concrete precast type.

C. Ecology blocks shall be standard concrete precast type, minimum 2 ft x 2 ft x 3 ft

(~1800 lb).

6 Simpson Strong-Tie is a registered trademark of Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. Pleasanton, California.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 46 of 315


06 10 00 – 4

2.6 WIRE ROPE AND HARDWARE

A. Wire rope and hardware in this section must meet the requirements of

DOE/RL-92-36.

B. Wire rope shall be 3/8-in. IPS independent wire rope core (IWRC).

C. Turnbuckle shall be drop forged, hot dipped galvanized, jaw & jaw type, with a

minimum allowable working load limit of 2,000 lbs.

D. Anchor shackles shall be screw pin type, galvanized, forged heat treated with

allow pin, with a minimum allowable working load limit of 2,000 lbs.

E. Thimbles shall be heavy duty, galvanized thimbles, sized to fit wire rope.

F. Eye bolts shall be forged steel, hot dipped galvanized after threading (UNC), with

hot dipped galvanized, heavy-hex nuts, with a minimum allowable load limit of

2,000 lbs. Use 3/4-in. diameter shaft maximum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Platform must be erected, altered, and dismantled by, or under the supervision of

qualified personnel.

B. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and

that are too small to use.

C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line,

cut, and fitted.

D. Securely assemble rough carpentry work and attach to substrate by anchoring and

fastening in accordance with IBC Table 2304.9.1, Fastening Schedule.

E. Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated.

F. Do not splice structural members between supports.

G. The spacing between uprights must not exceed 8 ft.

H. Each upright must be continuous (no butt joints with splice plates).

I. Adjacent uprights must be connected with horizontal bearers/ledgers to ensure

that the unbraced vertical length of an upright does not exceed 8 ft.

J. For two story platforms or platforms with floor heights greater than 4 ft, the

platform must be supported in two directions by a system of diagonal cross braces

secured to the upright as close to the bearers/ledgers as possible.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 47 of 315


06 10 00 – 5

K. The maximum floor height for any platform is 16 ft above grade.

L. Install/apply all materials and equipment per manufacturer’s instructions.

M. The overall length or width of any single level on a platform may not exceed

16 ft.

3.2 DIMENSIONS

A. Member must have minimum nominal dimensions as follows:

1. Uprights:

a. 4 in. x 4 in. for uprights up to 8-ft maximum floor height.

b. 6 in. x 6 in. for uprights between 8-ft and 16-ft maximum floor

height.

2. Ledgers/Bearers: 2 in. x 12 in., 8-ft maximum span.

3. Joists:

a. 2 in. x 6 in., 8-ft maximum unsupported length.

b. 2 in. x 10 in., 12-ft maximum unsupported length.

c. 2 in. x 12 in.:

i. With 16-in. spacing or less, 16-ft maximum unsupported

length.

ii. With spacing up to 24”, 14-ft maximum unsupported

length.

4. Braces: 1 in. x 6 in. or 2 in. x 4 in.

5. Guardrail (top rail): The top rail shall consist of two members.

2 in. x 4 in. member, flush with the top of the vertical posts, 2 in. side up,

with 2 in. x 6 in. member fastened to the top of each perimeter post and

resting on the 2 in. x 4 in. top rail member, 6 in. side up.

6. Guardrail (intermediate rail): 2 in. x 4 in. Intermediate rail shall be

fastened to posts on interior side of deck such that the platform worker

loads will not create pullout loading on the fasteners.

7. Handrail: See STAIR FRAMING, Paragraph 3.4.

8. Toeboards: 1 in. x 4 in. (minimum).

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 48 of 315


06 10 00 – 6

3.3 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING

A. Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not

less than 1 1/2 in. of bearing on wood. Attach floor joists as follows:

1. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal

framing anchors/hangers.

2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers or,

by using metal joist hangers.

B. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to 1/6 depth of joist, 1/3 at

ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2

in. from top or bottom.

C. Provide solid blocking of 2-in. nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of

joists unless nailed to header or band.

D. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less

than 4 in. or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of

2-in. nominal thickness by depth of joist over supports.

E. Provide bridging between joists of type indicated below, at intervals of 96-in. o.c.

1. Form diagonal wood bridging from bevel cut 1 by 3-in. nominal size

lumber, double-crossed and nailed both ends to joists.

F. Joists shall be spaced a maximum of 24-in. o.c.

3.4 STAIR FRAMING

A. Construct stairs as opposed to ladders or ramps for worker safety, decreased wind

loading, and to minimize interference with surrounding equipment.

B. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if

not otherwise indicated, to comply with the following requirements:

1. Stringer Size: 2 by 12-in. nominal size minimum.

2. Notching: Notch stringers to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at

least 3 1/2 in. of effective depth.

3. Stringer Spacing: Two stringers for stair widths up to 24 in. Three

stringers for stair width between 24 in. and 36 in. Four stringers for stair

width between 36 in. and 48 in.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 49 of 315


06 10 00 – 7

C. Provide stair framing that does not exceed the following variations between treads

and risers within each flight:

1. Adjacent treads and risers: 3/16 in.

2. Between largest and smallest treads and risers: 3/8 in.

D. Stair treads shall be a minimum of 10 in. deep.

E. Stairways shall have a minimum clear width of 22 in.

F. Stairs shall be installed at angles to the horizontal of between 30 and 50 degrees.

Any uniform combination of rise/tread dimensions may be used that will result in

a stairway at an angle to the horizontal within the permissible range.

G. All treads shall be reasonably slip-resistant and the nosings shall be of non-slip

finish. Rise height and tread width shall be uniform (within tolerances provided

above) throughout any flight of stairs including any foundation structure used as

one or more treads of the stairs.

H. Stairway platforms shall be no less than the width of a stairway and a minimum of

30 in. in length measured in the direction of travel.

I. Vertical clearance above any stair tread to an overhead obstruction shall be at

least 7 ft measured from the leading edge of the tread.

J. Handrails

1. Standard handrails shall be provided on the open sides of all exposed

stairways and stair platforms. Handrails shall be provided on at least one

side of closed stairways preferably on the right side descending.

2. Handrail shall consist of a lengthwise member mounted directly on a wall

or partition by means of brackets attached to the lower side of the handrail

so as to offer no obstruction to a smooth surface along the top and both

sides of the handrail.

3. The handrail members shall be of rounded or other section that will

furnish an adequate handhold for anyone grasping it to avoid falling.

Handrails shall be graspable and shall have a diameter of at least 1.25 in.

and not greater than 2 in. If the handrail is not circular, it shall have a

perimeter dimension of at least 4 in and not greater than 6.25 in. with a

maximum cross section dimension of 2.25 in. Edges shall have a

minimum radius of 0.01 in.

4. The ends of the handrail should be turned in to the supporting frame or

otherwise arranged so as not to constitute a projection hazard.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 50 of 315


06 10 00 – 8

5. The height of handrails shall not be more than 34 in. nor less than 30 in.

from upper surface of handrail to surface of tread in line with face of riser

or to surface of ramp.

6. The mounting of handrails shall be such that the completed structure is

capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 lbs applied in any direction

at any point on the rail.

7. All handrails shall be provided with a clearance of not less than 1.5 in.

between the handrail and any other object.

3.5 GUARDRAILS

A. A work platform 30 in. or more above grade level must have 42-in. guardrails

around all parts of the platform (except stair opening).

B. Regardless of height, open-sided platforms above or adjacent to dangerous

equipment shall be guarded with a standard railing and toe board.

C. A standard guardrail shall consist of top rail, intermediate rail, and posts, and shall

have a vertical height of 42-in. nominal from upper surface of top rail to top of

platform walking surface. The top rail shall be smooth-surfaced throughout the

length of the railing. The intermediate rail shall be approximately halfway

between the top rail and the platform. The ends of the rails shall not overhang the

terminal posts except where such overhang does not constitute a projection

hazard. The perimeter upright posts shall be incorporated into the guardrail.

D. The guardrail members shall be of rounded or other section that will furnish an

adequate handhold for anyone grasping it to avoid falling.

E. Toe boards shall be provided wherever, beneath the open sides,

1. Person can pass,

2. There is moving machinery, or

3. There is equipment with which falling materials could create a hazard.

F. A standard toe board shall be 4-in. minimum in vertical height from its top edge

to the platform walking surface. It shall be securely fastened in place and with

not more than 1/4-in. clearance above floor level.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 51 of 315


06 10 00 – 9

3.6 OPENINGS IN THE WORK PLATFORM AREA

A. Openings in the work platform area may not exceed a diameter greater than 6 in.

more than the diameter of the riser which protrudes through the platform area.

B. All other openings may not exceed 11 in. x 17 in. unless fall protection (gated if

necessary) is constructed to surround the hole.

C. Openings in the floor which are not in use shall be covered with grating (I-6010)

or board sufficient to support the designated live loads. The temporary floor

cover must be conspicuously covered and shall not exceed 3/4 in. over the

surrounding floor height in order to prevent a tripping hazard.

3.7 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS

A. The structure base must consist of gravel (min. 3-in. deep) which extends at least

12 in. beyond the perimeter of the structure in all directions.

B. All upright posts must be set on a pier block (12-in. x 12-in. min. base) using a

post base.

C. Install fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) materials in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions using recommended clips. Hold-down clips shall be

provided and spaced at a maximum of 4 ft apart with a minimum of four per piece

of grating, or as recommended by the manufacturer. After fabrication, all cut

ends, holes, and abrasions of FRP grating shall be sealed in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions, using a resin comparable to the grating resin.

D. Existing equipment.

1. Install the platform such that there is sufficient clearance between the

platform and the equipment such that the equipment is accessible for

modification, repair, adjustment, etc.

2. Existing equipment insulation may be removed provided that after the

platform structure is installed, the insulation is reinstalled or an equivalent

form of insulation is provided by the platform structure.

3. Care shall be taken to ensure that installation, removal, or regular use of

the platform structure will not interfere or cause damage to the existing

equipment.

E. Tie-Downs

1. Tie-downs shall be used at a minimum of four opposite corners of all

structures that have a total height to width ratio (overall width – short side)

greater than 1.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 52 of 315


06 10 00 – 10

2. Tie-downs for temporary structures should follow RPP-RPT-47003.

3. Tie-downs shall consist of wire rope, turnbuckles, and anchor shackles.

4. Tie-downs shall be connected to corner post eye-bolts and to ecology

blocks.

5. Eye-bolts shall be located as close as possible to, but lower than, the top

floor rim joist.

6. Eye-bolts shall be placed through the center of the post, using washers and

nuts as recommended by manufacturer.

7. Ecology blocks shall be placed:

a. Minimizing interference with surrounding equipment.

b. Minimizing interference with facility activities.

c. As close to the platform as possible.

d. Using one ecology block per tie-down.

3.8 ALLOWABLE LIVE LOADS

A. The allowable live loads are as follows:

1. Platform floor live load – 60 psf. On every platform assembly the

allowable floor live load shall be applied in a conspicuous place. Such

markings shall not be removed or defaced.

2. Stair live load.

a. 100 psf.

b. 300 lb concentrated load at center of tread.

3. Handrail live load

a. 50 plf applied at any direction at the top handrail.

b. 200 lb at any point at top of rail or stanchion.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 53 of 315


07 92 00 – 1

SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Clean and prepare joint surfaces.

B. Sealant and backing materials.

1.2 REFERENCES




A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

Title 40, Protection of

Environment – Part 59

National Volatile Organic Compound Emission

Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products


ASTM C920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM C1330 Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant

Backing Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants

ASTM D6690 Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants,

Hot Applied for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements

ASTM D994 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion

Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with the Contract Statement of Work.


1. Catalog Data: Unless specified on the design media, submit

Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including,

preparation instructions and recommendations, storage and handling

requirements and recommendations, as well as installation methods.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 54 of 315


07 92 00 – 2


A. Installer qualifications: Trained and/or experienced in the application of the use

of sealants to be used.

B. Source limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a

single manufacturer.


A. Comply with the Contract Statement of Work.

B. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging, with labels intact, until

ready for installation.

C. Store products off ground; if stored on roof, do not exceed structural capacity of

deck.

D. Store materials at minimum of 68°F for at least 24 hours prior to installation,

regardless of temperature at location.

E. Do not allow materials to freeze prior to application.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS


2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: – Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the

following limits for volatile organic compound content when calculated according

to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Sealant: Polysulphide base, single component, chemical curing; capable of being

continuously immersed in water, withstand movement up to 20 percent of joint

width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range to 40 –

80°F; Shore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum; nonstaining and

nonbleeding.

C. Sealant: Polysulphide base, two component, chemical curing; self-leveling type

for application in horizontal joints or nonsagging type for application in vertical

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 55 of 315


07 92 00 – 3

joints; uniform, homogeneous, and free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles

when mixed; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstanding

movement up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied

throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; shore A hardness of 15 minimum

and 50 maximum; nonstaining and nonbleeding.

D. Sealant: Silicone base, single component, solvent curing; capable of withstanding

movement of up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied

throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; shore A hardness of 50 maximum;

nonstaining.

E. Sealant: Silicone base, single component, chemical curing; capable of

withstanding movement of up to 50 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily

applied throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; shore A hardness of 50

maximum; nonstaining.

F. Sealant: Polyurethane base, multi-component, chemical curing; self-leveling type

for application in horizontal joints or nonsagging type for application in vertical

joints; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstanding movement

of up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a

temperature range of 40 – 80°F; uniform, homogeneous, and free from lumps,

skins, and coarse particles when mixed; shore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50

maximum; nonstaining; nonbleeding.

G. Sealant: Polyurethane base, single component, chemical curing; self-leveling

type for application in horizontal joints or nonsagging type for application in

vertical joints; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstanding

movement of up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied

throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; shore A hardness of 15 minimum

and 50 maximum; nonstaining; nonbleeding of up to 25 percent of joint width and

being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; shore A

hardness of 50 maximum; nonstaining.

H. Use either of the following for a concrete sealant.

1. Sealant: Hot poured, synthetic rubber or polymer-based asphalt, in

accordance with ASTM D6690 or equal.

2. Sealant: Cold-applied, two-part liquid neoprene, or equal.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit

application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant

manufacturer; compatible with joint-forming materials.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 56 of 315


07 92 00 – 4

C. Joint Filler: ASTM C1330 or ASTM D994; round, type as recommended by

sealant manufacturer; oversized 30 to 50 percent.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure-sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to

suit application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation, ensure that joint dimensions and physical and environmental

conditions are suitable for application of joint sealers.

B. By beginning the Work of this Section, Subcontractor warrants it has examined

and verified that existing conditions are in accordance with provisions of

Paragraph 3.1.A.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and size joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter that might impair adhesion

of sealant.

B. Verify that joint-shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

C. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth

ratios.

D. To allow sealants to perform properly, use joint filler to achieve required joint

depths.

E. Use bond breaker where required.

F. Before applying coating system or filler to concrete surfaces, perform a plastic

sheet test in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting.”

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install sealant per manufacturer’s instructions within specified shelf life.

B. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer

when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges.

C. Tool Joints as indicated on Drawings.

D. Joints: Free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

E. Coverage: Replace sealants that fail because of loss of cohesion or adhesion onto

surfaces applied or that do not cure. If the sealant can be detached from a surface

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 57 of 315


07 92 00 – 5

by rubbing the surface contact point with a finger, than the surface adhesion is

inadequate.

F. Follow manufacturer’s recommended cure time before painting or overcoating.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 58 of 315


09 91 00 – 1

SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL







A. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM D4258 Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating

ASTM D4263 Test Method for Indicating Moisture Content in

Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method

B. Sherwin-Williams®7

MACROPOXY® 646Fast Cure Epoxy Product

Sheet 4.5.3.

Zinc Clad®7 II Plus Inorganic Zine-Rich Coating

Product Sheet 6.13.

SEAGUARD®7 MP Multi-Purpose Epoxy Primer

Product Sheet 9.36.

C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

SSPC SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4 Brush-Off Blast Off Cleaning

SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2 Near White Blast Cleaning

1.2 SUBMITTALS



7 Sherwin-Williams, MACRPOXY, SEAGUARD, and Zinc Clad are registered trademarks of Swimc, Inc., Newark,

Delaware.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 59 of 315


09 91 00 – 2

1. List of materials: Unless specified on the design media, before delivery,

submit complete list of materials, colors, and location to be used. List

shall enumerate percentage of volatile and nonvolatile materials and

percentage of component parts of each type of material and the conversion

factors to determine dry film thickness from applied wet film thickness.

2. Dry film thickness test results as required by Paragraph 3.6.A.

C. Approval Not Required: None.


A. See Division 01 – General Requirements.


A. See the Contract Statement of Work for general requirements. Store materials

indoors.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. General: Ensure that surfaces are dry and have attained required temperatures and

conditions before starting work or continuing previously started work.

B. Weather: No exterior work shall be performed on unprotected surfaces if rain or

moisture from other sources is present or expected before applied finishes can dry

or attain proper cure.

C. Dust: No finishes shall be applied if dust is being generated at worksite.

D. Temperature

1. Unless recommended otherwise by paint manufacturer, apply coatings

when the following temperatures exist.

Ambient Surface

Coating Temperature Temperature

Epoxy As recommended by manufacturer

2. If necessary, provide temporary heat until specified temperatures exist for

required time periods. Maintain temporary heat for 24 hours after paint

application.

E. Humidity: Follow manufacturer’s directions for extremes.

F. Ventilation: Provide ventilation recommended for extremes.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 60 of 315


09 91 00 – 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Deleted.

B. Deleted.

C. Furnish Sherwin-Williams MACROPOXY 646 Fast Cure Epoxy, Part A

(B58-600) and Part B (B58V600).

D. Furnish Sherwin-Williams ZINC CLAD II Plus Inorganic Zine-Rich Coating,

Part A (B69VZ12), Part B (B69VZ15), and Part F (B69D11).

E. Furnish Sherwin-Williams SEAGUARD MP Multi-Purpose Epoxy Primer, Part A

(N12Y200) and Part B (N12V200).

F. Furnish appropriate applicators per manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive coatings for conditions that will adversely

affect execution, permanence, and quality of work, and which cannot be corrected

through specified preparation.

B. Report in writing to TOC Construction Representative conditions that may affect

proper application of finish. Correct unsuitable conditions before beginning

surface preparation or coating application.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection

1. Provide and install drop cloths, shields, and other protective devices to

protect surfaces adjacent to areas being painted. Keep spatter, smears,

droppings, and over-run of paint materials to a minimum and remove as

painting work progresses.

2. Promptly remove spills, splashes and splatter. Use removal methods

which do not damage surfaces being cleaned/painted.

3. Repair or replace surfaces damaged by painting work as directed by TOC

Construction Representative.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 61 of 315


09 91 00 – 4

4. Remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical diffusers,

escutcheons, registers, surface hardware, fittings, fastening, and similar

items before starting work.

B. New Surface Preparation

1. Deleted.

2. Carbon Steel

a. Prepare surfaces for scheduled finish sytems in accordance with

SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2.

3. Stainless Steel

a. Prepare surfaces for scheduled finish sytems in accordance with

SSPC-SP 7/ NACE No. 4

4. Obtain written approval from TOC Construction Representative before

using dry or liquid abrasive blasting.

C. Deleted.

D. Old Surface Prepration

1. Prepare touch up area for scheduled touch-up system in accordance with

SSPC-SP 3.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and this Section.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Furnish and maintain at Site, closed metal containers for disposal of waste

materials. Collect materials spotted or soaked with paint, oil, or solvents and

place in containers.

B. At completion of coating work, remove materials, containers, rags, cloths,

brushes, tools, and equipment from site.

3.5 SCHEDULES

A. Paint and Finish

1. Carbon Steel: Light and ordinary exposures (not galvanized)

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 62 of 315


09 91 00 – 5

a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams ZINC CLAD Plus. Shop apply 1 coat.

Coat should be 3 mils in thickness. Apply per manufacturer’s

instuctions.

b. Top Coat: Sherwin-Williams MACROPOXY 646. Field apply 2

coats. Coats should be 5-6 mils in thickness. Apply per

manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Stainless Steel indoors

a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams SEAGUARD MP. Shop apply 1 coat.

Coat should be 2-3 mils in thickness. Apply per manufacturer’s

instuctions.

b. Top Coat: Sherwin-Williams MACROPOXY 646. Field apply 2

coats. Coats should be 5-6 mils in thickness. Apply per


3. Touch-Up

a. Sherwin-Williams MACROPOXY 646. Field apply 2 coats.

Coats should be 5-6 mils in thickness. Apply per manufacturer’s

instructions.

4. Stainless Steel Pre-fabricated Heat-Traced and Insulated Pipe Spools for

Above Grade Piping Runs as Specified on the Drawings

a. Sherwin-Williams SEAGUARD MP. Shop apply 2 coats. Coats

should be 5-6 mils in thickness.

5. Stainless Steel outdoors, above and below grade

a. Sherwin-Williams SEAGUARD MP. Field apply 2 coats. Coats

should be 5-6 mils in thickness.

3.6 DELETED.

3.7 DELETED.

3.8 DELETED.


A. Measure the Wet Film Thickness (WFT) of each coat of material with a notched

WFT gage (Nordson®8 790-015) at a minimum of five evenly spaced points for

each 100 ft2 of surface area or portion thereof to verify the application will

8 Nordson is a registered trademark of Nordson Corporation, Westlake, Ohio.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 63 of 315


09 91 00 – 6

provide the specified minimum dry film thickness. Document results in work

package or fabrication documentation.

B. Inspection and testing will be performed by Quality Control Inspector.

C. Deleted.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 64 of 315


09 96 00 – 1

SECTION 09 96 00

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating

systems on interior concrete substrates, vertical and horizontal surfaces.

1.2 REFERENCES






A. American Standard for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM D4258 Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating

B. Master Painters Institute (MPI)

Architectural Painting Specification Manual

C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

SSPC SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Product Data: Before delivery, for each type of product indicated.

Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

2. Deleted.

3. Unless specified by design media, submit complete list of colors.

4. Deleted.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 65 of 315


09 96 00 – 2

C. Informational Submittals:

1. Field Quality Control inspection and test reports. See Paragraph 1.5.B.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

Not used.


A. Use manufacturers and products listed in MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual, approved product list.

B. Deliverable Documentation: The following documents and records, required by

this Section, shall be included in the work package or fabrication document as

applicapable.

Document Paragraph

Container Inspection Results 3.5.A

Film Thickness Results 3.5.B


A. See the Contract Statement of Work for additional general requirements

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers.

C. Storage: Maintain materials in clean and dry condition. Follow manufacturer’s

instructions.

D. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

E. Obtain inspection and acceptance by Quality Control Inspection before opening

containers or removing labels. See Paragraph 3.5.A.

1.7 PERMITS


1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding

air temperatures are between 50°F and 95°F, and in accordance with


B. Ventilation: Provide during and after application to meet applicable safety and

health regulations.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 66 of 315


09 96 00 – 3

1.9 EXTRA MATERIAL

Not used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES

See the Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

1. Cloverdale Paint.

2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

3. Sherwin-Williams®9 Company (The).

2.3 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and

are listed in “MPI Approved Products List.”

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible

with one another and substrates indicated.

2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

C. Coating Chemistry: Provide materials that are chloride and PCB free.

2.4 BLOCK FILLERS/SEALER

A. Concrete filler/sealer, Epoxy: MPI #116.

1. Cloverdale Paint; High Performance, Epoxy block Filler, 83065.

2. PPG; Aquapon®10

, Epoxy Block Filler, 97-685.

3. Sherwin-Williams; KEM CATI-COAT®9 HS Epoxy Filler/Sealer, B42

Series.

9 Sherwin-Williams, KEM CATI-COAT, and Tile Clad are registered trademarks of Swimc, Inc., Newark,

Delaware. 10

Aquapon is a registered trademark of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 67 of 315


09 96 00 – 4

2.5 EPOXY COATINGS

A. Epoxy, Gloss: MPI #77.

1. Cloverdale Paint; High Performance, ClovaCoat 300, 83300.

2. PPG; Aquapon 35, Aquapon 35 Polyamide-Epoxy Gloss, 95 Series.

3. Sherwin-Williams; Tile-Clad®9 HS Epoxy, B62WZ111/B60VX70.

B. Chemical Unloading Concrete Pad Coating.

1. KCC Containment Linings; Elasti-Liner V.

2. KCC Containment Linings; E 3.3 Epoxy Based Primer.

3. Epoxy Scratch Coat.

2.6 SLIP RESISTANT SURFACE ADDITIVE

A. Paint Finish Coat Admixture.

1. Rust-Oleum; Epoxy Shield, Aluminum Oxide Powder.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive coatings and conditions, with Applicator

present, for compliance with requirements and for conditions that will adversely

affect execution, permanence, and quality of Work, and which cannot be

corrected through specified preparation.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before application, sweep and dust space or area to receive coating.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual” applicable to substrates indicated.

C. Fill holes, cracks, recessed pockets, in concrete with manufacturer’s

recommended materials compatible with concrete substrate to produce even

surface for application of systems and to prevent entrapment of process-related

contaminates; fill material(s) shall be cementitious-based unless otherwise

approved.

1. A polymer concrete consisting of a mixture of specified filler and concrete

surfacers formulated in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations

or a similar premixed product may be used to repair gravel pockets, large

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 68 of 315


09 96 00 – 5

shrinkage cracks, etc. Coating system application may be initiated after

polymer concrete manufacturer’s recommended curing time. Polymer

concrete shall be compatible with coating system being applied.

2. Apply specified filler and concrete surfacers in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Remove or protect hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place

that are not to be painted.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades

involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied

protection.

E. Concrete Substrates:

1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.

2. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be

coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer’s written instructions.

3. Concrete shall be allowed to cure at least 14 days before coating is

applied; maximum moisture content of concrete, when measured with an

electronic moisture meter shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s

written instructions.

F. Clean concrete surfaces of laitance, oil, stains, dust, and other foreign material.

1. Where laitance has not been removed, treat concrete with uniform

application of 1 part 10% solution muriatic acid and 3 parts water or

5% solution of trisodium phosphate.

2. When solution ceases to foam, rinse concrete surface thoroughly with

clean water while scrubbing with stiff bristle brush. Remove and dispose

of waste solution in accordance Contract Statement of Work. Allow

treated area to thoroughly dry.

3. As an alternative to 1. and 2. above, remove laitance and prepare surface

in accordance with SSPC SP 3 or SP 6. Clean surfaces in accordance with

ASTM D4258.

G. Protection

1. Provide and install drop cloths, shields, and other protective devices to

protect surfaces adjacent to areas being coated. Keep spatter, smears,

droppings, and over-run of coating materials to minimum and remove as

coating work progresses.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 69 of 315


09 96 00 – 6

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply coating materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions

and recommendations in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual.”

1. Use applicators and equipment recommended by manufacturer using

techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats

until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

C. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays,

laps, brush marks, runs, sags, or other surface imperfections.

D. Chemical Unloading Concrete Pad Coating:

1. Prepare concrete surface with brush blast.

2. Apply E3.3 Primer, 3 – 5 wet mils.

3. Apply Epoxy Scratch Coat to imperfections and defects for smooth

surface.

4. Apply Elasti-Liner V.

a. Apply Elasti-Liner V basecoat, 20 wet mils.

b. Apply Elasti-Liner V topcoat, 2-40 wet mil coats.

c. Allow for a tack free cure between coats.

5. Final dry film thickness is 40 mils dry.

3.4 SLIP RESISTANT SURFACE ADDITIVE

A. Mix slip-resistive surface additive into the final topcoat at rate recommended by

the additive manufacturer.

1. Install at location indicated on Drawings to receive surface treatment.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect special protective coating containers to ensure material complies with

Specification requirements and manufacturer’s recommendations. Document

container inspection results in work package or fabrication document as

applicable.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 70 of 315


09 96 00 – 7

B. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not

comply with coating manufacturer’s written recommendations, Contractor

shall pay for additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that

complies with coating manufacturer’s written recommendations.

3. Document dry film thickness measurements in work package or

fabrication document as applicable.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Furnish and maintain at Site, closed metal containers for disposal of waste

materials. Place materials spotted or soaked with paint, oil, or solvents in

containers. Remove flammable waste from jobsite daily.

B. Thoroughly clean brushes, rollers, spatulas, other tools, and spray equipment after

each use. Cleaned tools and equipment shall contain no oils, thinners, and other

residue.

C. Remove empty cans from site at end of each shift.

D. At completion of coating work, remove materials, containers, rags, cloths,

brushes, tools, and equipment from site. Report all spills immediately.

E. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered

coating by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage

adjacent finished surfaces.

F. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating application.

G. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore

damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.7 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates: Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces:

1. Epoxy System:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy Filler/Sealer, MPI #116.

b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.

c. Topcoat: Epoxy gloss, MPI #77.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 71 of 315


13 34 19 – 1

SECTION 13 34 19

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, materials, equipment, and

services to furnish and erect pre-engineered metal buildings, including

foundation, electrical, and ventilation as indicated on the drawings and described

herein. The intent of this Specification is to provide a single source responsibility

for the design, manufacture, erecting, warrant, and testing of the complete

building systems. The building will house miscellaneous process heating and

compressed air equipment. Work under this Section includes the following:

1. Pre-engineered structural steel framework.

2. Wall framing and girts.

3. Roof framing and purlins.

4. Exterior roof panels.

5. Miscellaneous roof-mounted supports for Buyers Equipment.

6. Exterior metal wall panels.

7. Gutters and downspouts.

8. Partial height interior liner panels.

9. Standard accessories and trim for pre-engineered metal building including

eave trim, ridge trim, door trim, corner trim, sealants, weather stripping,

etc.

10. HVAC system design.

11. Insulation system for pre-engineered metal building (walls and roof).

12. Exterior doors (3).

13. Overhead doors (2).

14. Foundation design.

15. Duct supporting elements.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 72 of 315


13 34 19 – 2

16. Wall-Mounted Louvers.

17. Certified Material Test Reports.

B. Engineering Certification: The building foundation and building design and

analysis shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of

Washington. The stamped work shall include complete calculations for the

building, its components, erection drawings and details, and building column

reaction loads for foundation design. Calculations shall account for concentrated

loads, equipment, and fixtures shown on the drawings and specified herein.

C. Conflicts:

1. Identification of Conflicts: Should conflicts exist between this

Specification, attached drawings, and other referenced documents, they

shall be brought to the attention of the Buyer, in writing, prior to

proceeding with any work. The Buyer shall issue confirming

documentation if needed for clarification.

D. Related Sections:

1. Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.”

2. Section 05 53 00, “Metal Gratings.”

3. Section 06 10 00, “Carpentry.”

4. Section 09 96 00, “High-Performance Coatings.”

5. Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

E. Building Drawings:

1. H-14-110019, Sh. 2, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Grading Plan.”

2. H-14-110022, Sh. 1, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval General Elevations.”



5. H-14-110024, Sh. 1, Rev. 0, “A/AX Infrastructure Civil/Structural

Foundation Plan.”

6. H-14-110024, Sh. 2, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Civil/Structural Conc. Slab

Details.”

7. H-14-110024, Sh. 3, Rev. 0, “A/AX Infrastructure Civil/Structural

Foundation Details.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 73 of 315


13 34 19 – 3

8. H-14-110024, Sh. 4, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Civil/Structural Sump

Details.”

9. H-14-110024, Sh. 5, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Civil/Structural Details.”

1.2 REFERENCES






A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

Specification for Structural Joints Using High-

Strength Bolts – August 1, 2014

AISC 360 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

AISC Steel Design Guide Serviceability Design Considerations for Low-Rise

Series 3 Steel Buildings

B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

AISI S100 North American Specification for the Design of

Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other

Structures

D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Air Movement and Control

Association International, Inc. (AMCA)

AMCA 99 Standards Handbook

AMCA Publication 204 Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans

AMCA Standard 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified

Aerodynamic Performance Rating


AWS QC1 Standard for AWS Certification of Welding

Inspectors

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 74 of 315


13 34 19 – 4

F. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE)

Handbook—Fundamentals

ASHRAE Standard 52.2- Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-

2010 Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by

Particle Size

ASHRAE Standard 62.1 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

G. ASTM International (ASTM)



Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength

ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel,

Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile

Strength

ASTM A490 Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel

Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded

and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in

Rounds and Shapes

ASTM A529 Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-

Manganese Steel of Structural Quality


Nuts

ASTM A572 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-

Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel




ASTM A792 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 %

Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip

Process

ASTM A992 Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use

in Building Framing

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 75 of 315


13 34 19 – 5

ASTM A1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-

Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-

Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved

Formability, Solution-Hardened, and Bake

Hardenable

ASTM C991 Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass

Insulation for Metal Buildings

ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials

ASTM F436 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers

ASTM F844 Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain

(Flat), Unhardened for General Use

ASTM F1554 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36,

55, and 105 ksi Yield Strength

ASTM F1852 Standard Specification for “Twist off” Type

Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer

Assemblies

H. American Welding Society (AWS)

AWS A2.4 Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and

Nondestructive Examination



AWS D9.1 Sheet Metal Welding Code

I. International Accreditation Service, Inc. (IAS)

Quality Certification Program

J. International Code Council (ICC)


K. Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA)

Metal Building Systems Manual, 2010 Edition

L. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 76 of 315


13 34 19 – 6

NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code

M. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA)

HVACMF HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and

Flexible

N. Steel Door Institute (SDI)

SDI 100 Recommended Specifications, Standard Steel Doors

and Frames

O. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

UL 580 Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies

P. U.S. Department of Energy (DOE)

DOE G 414.1-3 Suspect/Counterfeit Items Guide for Use with

10 CFR 830 Subpart A – Quality Assurance

Requirements, and DOE O 414.1C – Quality

Assurance

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Proposal Submittals

1. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature and technical data.

2. Product Data: For each type of Metal Building System component.

Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finished for the following:

a. Structural wall panels.

b. Metal roof panels.

c. Metal wall panels.

d. Metal liner panels.

e. Insulation System.

f. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning: Description of

proposed approach to HVAC design and proposed equipment.

g. Overhead roll-up doors.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 77 of 315


13 34 19 – 7

h. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, provide

complete set of color chips representing manufacturer’s full range

of available colors and patterns.

3. Certificates

a. Manufacturer: IAS Quality Certification:

i. IAS certificate showing name and address of manufacturer,

effective date, and category of certification. (See

Paragraph 1.5.A.1.)

b. Erector: IAS Quality Certification:

i. IAS certificate showing name and address of erector,

effective date, and category of certification, or, in lieu of

IAS certification, documentation of past 5 years’

experience record to include project name, location, date of

completion, building manufacturer, and contact name and

phone number. (See Paragraph 1.5.A.2.)

c. HVAC Contractor:

i. Documentation of current Associated Air Balance Council

(AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau

(NEBB) certifications for those engineers/technicians in

responsible charge of the work under this scope.

C. Approvals Required Prior to Work Submittals

1. Structural Design Analysis Calculation(s) for the metal building including

design loads and design criteria. Design calculation shall be signed and

sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer.

2. Submit anchor bolt placement plan and column reactions and base plate

details in advance of erection drawings.

3. Structural foundation analysis and design calculation, signed and sealed by

a Registered Professional Engineer.

4. HVAC system equipment and duct design calculations and drawings

bearing the seal and signature of a Registered Professional Engineer

responsible for the system design.

5. Shop Drawings:

a. Bear seal and signature of Registered Professional Engineer

responsible for system design.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 78 of 315


13 34 19 – 8

b. Complete erection drawings with identification and assembly of

building components indicating: assembly dimensions, locations of

structural members, connections, attachments, openings, cambers,

and loads wall and roof system dimensions, panel layout, general

construction details, anchorages and method of anchorage

installation, and include details of edge conditions, joints, panel

profiles, corners, trim, flashings, closures and special details,

distinguishing between factory- and field-assembled work; framing

anchor bolt settings, and locations from datum, indicate welded

connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols, distinguishing

between shop and field applications; indicate net weld lengths.

c. Show structural design basis information, and materials

specification information.

d. Show wall-mounted items including doors and louvers.

e. Accessory Drawings and installation details: Include details of the

following items:

i. Flashing and Trim.

ii. Gutters.

iii. Downspouts.

iv. Details to be used around piping penetrations.

v. Louvers, ducting, HVAC equipment, duct supporting

elements.

f. Door Schedule: For doors and frames. Include details of

reinforcement.

g. Structural foundation drawings and details showing reinforcement

footing and stem wall details.

6. Material Certification

a. Submit Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs): covering the

chemical and physical properties for the following materials:

i. Structural Steel.

ii. High-strength bolts, including nuts and washers.

iii. Unfinished bolts and nuts.

iv. Weld material.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 79 of 315


13 34 19 – 9

7. Submit detailed HVAC test and balance procedures, including test

conditions for systems to be tested, prior to beginning the work.

8. Balancing and test report following completion of system adjustments

including test results, adjustments, and rebalancing procedures.

D. Information Only Submittals

1. Instructions and Maintenance Manuals:

a. Manufacturer’s written instructions for shipping, handling, storage,

and protection.

b. Manufacturer’s erection or installation instructions for building

and components. Indicate preparation requirements and proper

sequence of installation.

c. Maintenance Data: for metal panel finishes, to include in

maintenance manual.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Buyer: The party who awards the contract to the Contractor.

B. Installation Contractor: The party responsible for the labor, equipment, testing,

and building erection.

C. Manufacturer: The party responsible for the complete and integrated pre-

engineered metal building system including: labor, equipment, design, furnishing

of components and accessories, fabrication, examination, testing, and warrant of a

complete building system.

D. Primary Structural Framing or Members: Refers to any built-up, hot-rolled, or

cold-form columns or framing systems which transfer their loads directly to the

structure’s foundation.

E. Secondary Structural Framing or Members: Refers to any cold-form, hot-rolled,

or built-up purlins, girts, struts, bracing, or beams which transfer their loads from

the cladding to the primary structural framing or members to which they attach.


A. Qualifications

1. Manufacturer’s Qualifications:

a. The Company manufacturing the products specified in this Section

shall have a minimum of 5 years documented experience in the

manufacture of Metal Building Systems of similar to that specified.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 80 of 315


13 34 19 – 10

b. As a manufactured product, the design, detailing, and fabrication

of the pre-engineered metal building shall be performed by or

under the direct supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer

in the state of Washington, who is a permanent full-time employee

of the manufacturer of the pre-engineered metal building.

c. The metal building systems manufacturer shall be accredited under

the International Accreditation Service, (IAS) “Accreditation

Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal

Building Systems (AC472).”

d. Member of the MBMA.

2. Installation Contractor Qualifications:

a. Acceptable to and approved by manufacturer.

b. All workmen and their supervisors shall have specialized

experience in the erection of Metal Building Systems similar to

that specified, for a period of at least 5 years documented, and

approved by the manufacturer.

c. Erector shall employ persons trained for installations of metal

buildings.

3. Certificate of design and manufacture conformance:

a. Metal building system manufacturer shall submit written

certification prepared and signed by a Professional Engineer,

registered to practice in the state of Washington verifying that

building system design and metal roof system design (including

panels, clips, and support system components) meet indicated

loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Certification shall reference specific dead loads, live loads, snow

loads, wind loads/speeds, tributary area load reductions (if

applicable), concentrated loads, collateral loads, seismic loads,

end-use categories, governing code bodies, including year, and

load applications.

c. Certificate shall be on metal building system manufacturer’s

letterhead.

4. HVAC Contractor

a. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing

adjusting and balancing of HVAC equipment and systems.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 81 of 315


13 34 19 – 11

b. Certification by AABC of NEBB for testing, adjusting, and

balancing of HVAC systems.

c. Perform work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and

Balance Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and

Adjusting Supervisor.

5. Qualification of Welding Personnel and Procedures

a. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall have

been qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1 prior to welding.

Maintain copy of welding procedure specifications (WPSs),

procedure qualification records (PQRs), and welder performance

qualification test results at jobsite.

b. Visual welding inspection methods shall be used for verification of

weld quality as outlined by AWS D1.1, Paragraph 6.9, with Visual

Inspection Acceptance Criteria, in Table 6.1.

c. Qualification of Welding Inspectors: Welding inspectors shall be

AWS Certified Welding Inspectors qualified and certified in

accordance with AWS QC1.

6. Materials

a. The manufacturer shall ensure that no suspect or counterfeit parts

or components are provided in conjunction with this procurement.

Suspect/counterfeit items are described in Appendices 4 and 5 of

DOE G 414.1-3.

b. CMTRs in accordance with Paragraphs 2.2.A.3, 2.2.A.5, and

2.2.C.4.


A. See Contract Statement of Work for additional general requirements.

B. Protect building components and accessories from corrosion, deformation, and

other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

C. Deliver to project site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or bundles,

fully identified with product name, manufacturer, type, and grade.

D. Store off the ground (e.g., on wood blocking or pallets) and protect with

impervious covering. Protect from rusting and damage or permanent distortion.

E. Protect finish of metal panels during storage, handling, and installation by

application of removable plastic film or other suitable material placed between

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 82 of 315


13 34 19 – 12

panels. Do not allow panels to come in contact with other material that would

result in scratching, denting, staining, or other damage to the panel finish.

1.7 PERMITS


1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

A. The following site features and adjacent structures shall be considered in the

design/construction as appropriate:

1. This Building is approximately 40 ft away from Building 242A-BA and

approximately 15 ft from the associated diesel storage tank, to the south of

the Building, as shown on Drawing H-14-110019, Sheet 1.

2. Electrical transformer equipment will be located to the east of the

building. See Drawing H-14-110019, Sheet 1.

1.9 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The metal building shall be clear span, rigid frame steel structure with tapered

columns and roof beams, gable roof, without interior columns.

B. Minimum Roof Slope: 1 in. in 12 in. (1:12)

C. Building Dimensions/Bay Spacing/Eave Height: As indicated on the Drawings.

D. The building shall be designed by the manufacturer as a complete system. All

components of the system shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.

1. Primary Framing System: Primary framing shall consist of transverse

rigid frames of rafters and columns with solid webs. The rigid frame shall

be fabricated of shop-welded steel plate sections, tapered columns, and

roof beams, complete with necessary splice plates, factory drilled for

bolted field assembly as specified in this Section.

2. Beam and Post Endwall Frames: Endwall corner posts and endwall roof

beams, manufacturer’s standard, as required by design criteria (building

will not be expandable).

3. Secondary framing shall consist of purlins, girts, eave struts, flange braces,

and sag angles as required by design.

4. Lateral Bracing: manufacturer’s standard to accommodate horizontal loads

not resisted by main frame action in the sidewall, endwall, and roof.

Cables and/or wire rope bracing shall not be used.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 83 of 315


13 34 19 – 13

5. Wall System: Preformed steel panels, trim and accessories, with insulation

as specified in this Section.

6. Roof Purlins: manufacturer’s standard zee purlins mounted on top of

structural frame members.

7. Roof System: Standing-seam roof panels with insulation, as specified in

this Section, Paragraph 2.3.

8. Interior liner panels.

9. Soffit panels.

10. Accessories: Building louvers, overhead doors, walk-in doors, hardware,

sealers, gutters, and downspouts.

1.10 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance

1. Provide metal building system capable of withstanding the effects of

gravity loads and the following loads within the limits and conditions

indicated.

2. Size and fabricate wall and roof system free of distortion or defects

detrimental to appearance or performance.

B. Building Design Requirements

1. Applicable Building Code: The IBC, as amended by DOE, the State of

Washington, and local agencies. The occupancy category is IV (seismic

design category D) as defined in IBC and shall be designed as

performance category 2 (PC-2) structure for safety significant service.

2. Architectural/Code Data:

a. The occupancy of the building as defined in IBC is: F-1, Factory

Industrial.

b. Construction Classification: Type IIB, Non-combustible.

c. Required Fire Resistance Ratings: None.

d. Fire Protection: None/Not Required.

e. Fire Extinguishers: Provided by others.

f. Exit Lighting: Provided by others.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 84 of 315


13 34 19 – 14

3. Fabrication of structural members shall be in accordance with MBMA,

and for items not covered therein, AISC 360.

4. Snow Load:

a. Ground Snow Load (Pg): 15 pounds per square foot.

b. Exposure Coefficient (Ce): C.

c. Importance Factor (I): 1.00.

5. Minimum Roof Live Load: 20 pounds per square foot. Live load

reduction not permitted.

6. Building System Dead Load: Shall be the weight of the Metal Building

System and as determined by the building system manufacturer.

7. Collateral Loads: The Contractor shall state the allowable collateral loads

for roof purlins and secondary framing, and primary rigid frames (the

weight of any non-moving equipment or material, such as ceilings,

electrical or mechanical equipment, sprinkler, conduit, etc.).

a. Metal building design shall include the Buyers Pipe/Conduit

Support Beams as shown in Figure 9. See Paragraph 1.10.B.15.

8. Wind Load:

a. IBC/ASCE 7:

i. Basic Wind Speed: 115 miles per hour (3-second gust).

ii. Exposure Category (Ce): C.

iii. Project-Specific Importance Factor (I): 1.0.

iv. Enclosed building.

b. All Members, including secondary roof and wall members, shall be

designed for component and cladding net wind pressures as

determined by ASCE 7.

i. Secondary roof members shall be designed for a minimum

20 psf net component and cladding uplift pressure.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 85 of 315


13 34 19 – 15

9. Earthquake Load:

a. IBC:

i. Occupancy Classification: Category IV

ii. IBC Site Class: C.

iii. Seismic Design Category: D.

iv. Project Specific Importance factor: 1.5 per ASCE 7.

v. Spectral Response Factors:

· Horizontal: SD1 = 0.192g and SDS = 0.588g

· Vertical: SD1 = 0.098 and SDS = 0.346g

10. Load Combinations:

a. Design metal building system to withstand the most critical effects

of load factors and load combinations (dead, live, snow,

earthquake, wind, etc.) in accordance with ASCE 7 or IBC.

11. Deflection Criteria:

a. In accordance with the applicable provisions of the AISC Steel

Design Guide Series 3 – Serviceability Design Considerations for

Low-Rise Steel Buildings.

b. Applies to primary and secondary framing members, bracing

members, roof panels, and wall cladding.

12. Drift Provisions:

a. Maximum horizontal deflection, or drift, at the roof level of a

structure as measured at the eave in relation to the concrete floor

slab, shall be the lesser of 1 in. or H/250 based on a 50-year wind

storm.

13. Thermal Effects: Standing Seam roof panels shall be free to move in

response to the expansion and contraction forces resulting from a

temperature variation. Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal

movements resulting from change in ambient and surface temperatures by

preventing buckling, failure of joint seals, failure of connections, and other

detrimental effects.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 86 of 315


13 34 19 – 16

14. Structural Steel Design Standards:

a. All structural steel sections and welded plate members shall be

designed in accordance with the AISC Manual of Steel

Construction and AWS D1.1.

b. MBMA, Metal Building Systems Manual.

c. AISC 360.

d. Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members: Design in accordance

with AISI S100.

e. Structural System: Design in accordance with specified building

Code. (Refer to Building Design Requirements, Paragraph

1.10.B.)

15. Roof Mounted Supports for Buyers Equipment

a. Provide pipe/conduit support beams as shown on the Drawings

(Figure 9) for support of the Buyers piping, conduit and cable runs.

16. Each beam shall be designed to support a distributed load of 175 lb/ft.

a. Metal framing systems attached to purlins in accordance with

Building Manufacturer recommendations, where shown on

Drawings:

i. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

ii. Tolco®11

, Inc.

iii. Unistrut®12

Corp.; Unistrut International

b. Repair insulation liner, as required, in accordance with


C. Building Anchorage and Foundation Design:

1. The scope for the building foundation design will be by the Contractor.

Foundation design will support the building reactions and other loads that

may be imposed by the building use developed and provided by the

building manufacturer.

2. Foundation shall comply with IBC and ACI 318.

11

Tolco is a registered trademark of Cooper B-Line, Inc., Highland, Illinois. 12

Unistrut is a registered trademark of Unistrut International Corporation, Wayne, Michigan.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 87 of 315


13 34 19 – 17

D. Anchor Bolts:

1. Provide the design for anchor bolts (including size, length and

embedment), which shall be designed to resist all column reactions.

2. The building anchor bolts shall be designed to resist the maximum column

reactions resulting from the specified combinations of loadings. The

column reactions will be provided by the building manufacturer.

3. Anchor bolts will be supplied by the Contractor and not by the building

manufacturer.

4. Anchor bolts/rods shall meet ASTM F1554.

E. Electrical requirements for HVAC Equipment

1. Provide the work in accordance with NFPA 70. Electrical material and

equipment shall be accepted, certified, listed, labeled, or otherwise

determined safe by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).

Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards

published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., shall conform to those

standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

2. Each major load (e.g., each electric unit heater, fan, etc.) will be provided

with a local disconnect switch provided by Buyer. The Buyer will be

responsible for providing conductors and conduit from equipment to

disconnect switch. Connection of building supply power to disconnect

switch will be Buyer.

3. The AREA is electrically unclassified.

4. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4.

5. Building power to equipment will be 480 VAC/ 3 ph / 60 Hz.

F. Heating and Ventilation

1. Contractor shall provide the design for building heating, ventilation and

air-conditioning. The system shall be a ducted system. The HVAC design

shall be such that the total heating and cooling load be divided into two

50% systems to afford some degree of conditioning and ventilation should

one unit be taken out of service. Design to preclude accidental excessive

negative pressure in the building.

2. Design Criteria:

a. The site meteorological pressure shall be measured at an elevation

of 733 ft.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 88 of 315


13 34 19 – 18

b. For equipment sizing and building heating or cooling load

calculations, design conditions for Hanford shall be used, which

are:

i. Annual Heating Design Conditions @ 99%

· Temperature 12.6 °F DB

· Dew Point 4.6 °F

· Humidity Ratio 7.2 grains water/lb. dry air

· Mean coincident DB 15.1 °F

c. Annual Cooling Design Conditions @ 2%

i. Temperature 93.3°F DB

ii. Mean coincident WB 64.1°F

iii. Dew Point 53.4°F

d. HVAC equipment located outdoor shall be designed for the

extreme bounding temperatures of:

i. Summer: 115°F

ii. Winter: -25°F

e. Blowing Dust: Concentration of 0.177 g/m3, with wind speeds of

18 m/s at a height of 3 m. Particle size will be less than 150 µm in

size.

f. Solar Radiation: Solar radiation environment of 900 Langleys.

g. Equipment Heat Loads: (Basis: See Attachment 1)

i. Electrical equipment heat load: 3,300 watt

ii. Water heater heat load: 26.4 kW

iii. Electric motor heat load: 4,350 watt

iv. Personnel Load: 5 people; 1,500 Btu/hr per person

(assume: heavy work load)

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 89 of 315


13 34 19 – 19

3. Indoor Design Conditions

a. Heating Load Calculation:

i. The winter outdoor dry bulb design temperature listed

above shall apply.

ii. The indoor design temperature shall be no higher than 70°F

for personnel and no less than 60°F to provide adequate

equipment protection. The design basis shall be based on

personnel comfort.

iii. No credit shall be taken for heat gain from equipment or

personnel as equipment may or may not be running, and

personnel numbers vary.

b. Cooling Load Calculation:

i. The indoor design temperature shall be no less than 78°F

and no higher than 104°F to provide adequate equipment

protection. The design basis shall be for personnel

comfort.

4. Air System Design

a. The maximum flow rate shall be determined based on the loads

expected to achieve design conditions. Ventilation system

ductwork system shall be designed by the constant velocity method

and pre-balanced through duct sizing; however, ducting shall

incorporate manually adjustable dampers into the design.

b. Air distribution system shall be designed in accordance with

ASHRAE Fundamentals, “Duct Design” section.

c. All ductwork and fittings shall be fabricated in accordance with the

latest edition of the SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction

Standards Metal and Flexible,” and according to the static pressure

expected to be encountered in the system. Flexible duct shall not

be used for return or exhaust systems.

d. Manufacturer’s standard diffusers, registers, and grills shall be

used.

e. Manually adjustable volume dampers shall be provided ahead of

flexible ducts serving supply grills, registers, and diffusers.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 90 of 315


13 34 19 – 20

f. Welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, for structural

carbon steel, or AWS D9.1 for stainless and carbon steel sheet

metal

5. Control System

a. HVAC system shall be designed and installed using commercially

available equipment and techniques to control the temperature,

pressure and air quality. All thermostats shall be manually

adjustable over the operating range.

6. Piping and Coils

a. HVAC equipment shall be located outdoors. (See Paragraph

1.10.F.15.) The location of air-conditioning equipment

components shall account for piping and equipment pressure drop,

and equipment clearance and maintenance requirements. Access

shall be provided for the removal of any coil or other equipment

component, in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendation.

7. Ventilation and Exhaust

a. Building shall be provided with fresh ventilation air. Minimum

ventilation shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62.1-

2010 using the Ventilation Rate Procedure.

8. Materials

a. Metallic parts shall be of corrosion resistant metal, or suitably

finished to resist corrosion.

b. Materials shall be free from defects or imperfections that my affect

performance. The use of rebuilt or refurbished components is

prohibited for initial construction.

9. Noise Level

a. The mechanical equipment noise emissions at the maximum flow

rate condition shall be less than 85 dBA, 8-hour time weighted

average or equivalent noise dose when measured by a calibrated

noise meter at 1 meter from the source.

10. Maintainability

a. Equipment, instrumentation, and items requiring maintenance shall

be accessible for ease of inspection and removal/replacement.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 91 of 315


13 34 19 – 21

11. Filters

a. Filters for dust removal shall be provided and shall be designed for

ease of replacement. Filters shall have a minimum efficiency of

80% in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2.

12. Fans

a. Fans shall be industrial grade and shall be sized to provide the

required HVAC system, required by this Specification. Fan shall

meet, as a minimum, ANSI/AMCA Publication 204 (Balance and

Quality), ANSI/AMCA Standard 210, (Laboratory Methods of

Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating), and

ANSI/AMCA 99 (Standards Handbook).

b. Fan assembly shall be constructed of material that is compatible

with the interconnected ducting. Machine guards shall be provided

to protect personnel from rotating shafts.

13. Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Ductwork

a. Hangers for piping and ductwork shall be designed to

accommodate the IBC earthquake loads specified in Paragraph

1.10.B.9.

b. Metal framing systems:

i. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

ii. Tolco, Inc.

iii. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

c. Structural Steel: ASTM A36, steel plates, shapes, and bars;

galvanized.

d. Install lateral bracing and supports to prevent swaying.

14. Louvers

a. Louvers shall be automatic intake dual combination louver

damper. Stationary blades with extruded vinyl seals and automatic

backdraft blades contained within an aluminum frame. Louver

shall include a bird screen and filter rack.

b. Louvers shall be sized and designed to accommodate the design

conditions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 92 of 315


13 34 19 – 22

c. Louver design and structure shall withstand a minimum wind load

of 20 lbs per sq. ft. (equivalent to a 90 mph wind).

d. Paint and prime to match wall panels.

15. Constraints to HVAC Design:

a. The Buyer has performed an electrical lighting analysis and has

located light fixtures as shown in the attached drawings. The

Contractor shall design and locate the duct system and associated

duct support hangers to avoid interference with the lighting.

b. An area for the equipment pad for HVAC equipment has been

designated/located as shown on the Drawings. Seller shall identify

equipment footprint necessary for anchoring the equipment.

Equipment weights (operating) shall be provided to the Buyer for

substantiating the pad design by the Seller.

G. Performance Requirements

1. Thermal Performance

a. Provide insulated metal panel assemblies for roof and wall with the

following minimum R-Values, and as required to accommodate

building heating and ventilation requirements:

i. R-Value Metal Roof Panel Assemblies: 30.

ii. R-Value Metal Wall Panel Assemblies: 19.

iii. R-Value Metal Man-Doors: 5.

iv. R-Value Metal Roll-up Doors: 5.

H. Warranty

1. The manufacturer for the pre-engineered metal building shall be warrant in

writing against defects in materials and workmanship, and that after

erection is completed, system shall be weather tight. The warranty period

shall be 5 years from date of completion erection.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BUILDING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

A. Products manufactured or supplied by the following, and meeting these

Specifications may be used on this Project:

1. American Buildings Company, Columbus, GA.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 93 of 315


13 34 19 – 23

2. Butler Manufacturing Co., Kansas City, MO.

3. Garco Building Systems, West Houston, TX.

4. HCI Steel Buildings, Arlington, WA.

5. Kirby Building Systems, Inc., Columbus, GA.

6. Nucor Building Systems, Waterloo, IN.

2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

A. Primary Framing

1. Primary Framing: manufacturer’s standard primary-framing system,

designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements and that

provides the configuration shown on the Drawings. Column and rafter

type shall be tapered. Interior columns are not permitted.

2. All framing members shall carry an easily visible identifying mark to aid

the installation Contractor in the erection of the building.

3. The manufacturer shall submit CMTRs that verify that the material

strength requirements have been met, and chemical requirements are in

accordance with the applicable ASTM.

4. Plates, Stiffeners, etc.: All base plates, splice plates, cap plates, and

stiffeners shall be factory welded into place on the structural members and

factory drilled/punched for bolted field assembly.

5. All welded shop connections shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1.

Provide CMTRs for weld materials for primary framing weldments.

6. Hot-rolled shapes and flat bar shall conform to ASTM A1011, ASTM

A992, ASTM A572, or ASTM A529, Grade 55, having a minimum yield

strength of 55,000 psi.

7. Round Tube shapes: ASTM A500, Grade B, with minimum yield strength

of 42,000 psi.

8. Cold formed shapes: ASTM A1011, Grade 55 or ASTM A653, Grade 55.

9. X-Bracing: ASTM A529, A572, or A36. Do not use wire rope or cable

for permanent bracing. Angles: fabricated from structural-steel shapes to

match primary framing.

10. All field connections shall be bolted. Bolts shall be ASTM F1852 “twist-

off” type tension control bolt, nut, and washer assemblies. Bolts shall

conform to ASTM A325.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 94 of 315


13 34 19 – 24

11. Shop Primer of Structural Steel Framing System:

a. Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil,

grease, and other matter precluding paint bond. Follow, as

appropriate, one or more specifications of the Steel Structures

Painting Council.

b. Apply one coat of rust inhibitive alkyd zinc chromate, red oxide, or

waterborne primer, 1.0 mil dry thickness.

B. Secondary Framing

1. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer’s standard secondary framing,

including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable

angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members.

Unless otherwise indicated by design, fabricate framing from either cold-

formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, to

comply with the following:

a. Roof Purlins, Sidewall, and Endwall Girts: Z-shaped sections of

adequate size and thickness as determined by the design criteria.

b. Steel for cold-formed galvanized channel and Z-sections shall be

ASTM A1011, Grade 55 (55,000 psi minimum yield stress), with

G60 galvanized coating.

c. Base or Sill Angles: zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.

d. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from cold-

formed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame

head and jamb of door openings and head, jamb, and sill of other

openings.

e. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer’s standard

sections fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-

up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to

withstand required loads.

C. Bolted Connections

1. Primary Framing: ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 high-strength bolted

connections.

2. Secondary Framing: ASTM A307 or ASTM A325.

3. ASTM A563 heavy-hex carbon steel nuts; and ASTM F436 hardened

carbon-steel washers.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 95 of 315


13 34 19 – 25

4. Provide CMTRs for high-strength bolts, including nuts and washers, and

CMTRs for unfinished bolts and nuts.

2.3 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS

A. Provide roofing, siding, interior metal liner, and soffit sheets formed to the

general profile or configuration customarily utilized by the metal building system

manufacturer to meet the Specification requirements.

1. Metal Roof System: Standing seam roof panels; manufacturer’s factory-

formed standing seam roof panel system designed for mechanical

attachment of panels to roof purlins using a concealed clip. Roof system

shall meet UL Wind Uplift Classification Rating, UL 580: Class 90. Form

panels from 24 gauge, 50,000 psi minimum yield Galvalume®13

sheet

steel, ASTM A792, grade 50, with a color coating. Perimeter trim,

start/finish panels, ridge cover, and transition flashing shall be provided

and shall be designed to accommodate the roof’s expansion/contraction.

Closures, sealants, and fasteners shall be provided as required for a

weather-tight installation.

2. Wall Panels: Manufacturer’s standard factory-formed panel system

designed for mechanical attachment of panels to girts using exposed

fasteners. Form panels of a minimum of 24-gauge, zinc-coated steel

sheets. Panel Profile: PBR, 1 1/4-in. deep ribs which are trapezoidal in

shape and are spaced on 12-in. centers; one piece, extending from sill to

eave, with base trim at sill and eave trim. Closures, sealants, and fasteners

shall be provided as required for a weather-tight installation.

3. Interior Liner Panels: Manufacturer’s standard factory-formed panel

system designed for mechanical attachment of panels to girts using

exposed fasteners. Form panels of minimum of 24-gauge, zinc-coated

steel sheets, ASTM A653. Finish shall be: shop-applied baked enamel

finish, to liner panels, and related trim and accessory elements. Apply

finish coat on the exposed face and manufacturer’s standard wash coat on

the reverse face; color shall be manufacturer’s standard white. Liner

height shall be 8 ft from finished floor. Provide matching cap trim and

trim around walk doors.

4. Soffit Panels: Manufacturer’s standard factory-formed, soffit panel

system designed for mechanical attachment of panels using exposed

fasteners. Form panels of minimum 26-gauge, zinc-coated steel sheet,

ASTM A653.

5. Panel Coatings: Exterior side of roof, soffit, and siding panels shall be

finished with an extended life, fluoropolymer coating utilizing

13

Galvalume is a registered trademark of BIEC International, Inc., Vancouver, Washington.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 96 of 315


13 34 19 – 26

Kynar®14

500/Hylar®15

5000 resin. Reverse side of panels shall receive

manufacturer’s standard wash coat. Surfaces shall be properly prepared

and primed, then coated and oven-baked to cure. Top coating shall have a

dry film thickness of 0.75-0.90 mils on the exterior surface, over 0.2 mils

nominal dry film thickness of epoxy type primer over galvanized or

Galvalume sheet. The interior surface shall be protected by

manufacturer’s standard wash coat system of 0.6 ± 0.05 mils thickness.

B. Flashing, Trim & Closures

1. Flashing and/or trim shall be furnished at eaves, rake, corners, base,

framed openings, and wherever necessary to seal against the weather and

provide a finished appearance. Coatings shall match associated roofing,

liner and siding panels.

C. Sealant, Sealing Tape, Weather-strips:

1. Concealed Joint Sealants: Non-shrinking, non-drying butyl-based sealant

specifically formulated for factory application in standing seams.

2. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or

silicon rubber sealant as recommended by the manufacturer.

3. Tape Sealers: Manufacturer’s standard pressure-sensitive, non-corrosive,

non-curing butyl tape.

4. Weather strips: Door manufacturer’s standard approved products; closed

cell neoprene or extruded vinyl.

2.4 INSULATION AND VAPOR BARRIERS

A. Fiberglass banded blanket or batt insulation system:

1. Insulation: ASTM C991, Type 1 fiberglass blanket insulation.

2. Manufacturer’s standard continuous polyethylene film vapor retarder liner,

white in color.

3. The composite product shall have a fire hazard classification of

25 (maximum) flame spread index and 50 (maximum) smoke developed

index, when used in accordance with ASTM E84.

4. Accessories: Include all insulation hangers, sealants, and fasteners as

required by the manufacturer for a complete system.

14

Kynar is a registered trademark of Arkema, Inc., Prussia, Pennsylvania. 15

Hylar is a registered trademark of Solvay Solexis, Inc., Thorofare, New Jersey.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 97 of 315


13 34 19 – 27

5. Manufacturer: Simple Saver System®16

, Thermal Design, Madison, NE;

or equal.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Personnel Doors, Frames, and Hardware:

1. Provide where shown on the attached Drawings.

2. Insulated metal doors and frames shall comply with IBC, SDI-100, Level

3, extra heavy duty, Model 2 (seamless), minimum 16-gauge faces.

3. Standard 3-ft wide by 7-ft high by 1 3/4-in. thick.

4. Glazing: Narrow lite glass (N) panel with trim and flexible polycarbonate

panel.

5. Manufacturer’s standard zinc-coated galvanized steel, and finish painted,

with closure at top of doors.

6. Furnish manufacturer’s standard hardware: Lockset, strike plate, weather-

stripping and threshold, kick plate.

7. Doors and frames shall be designed by their manufacturer to withstand the

wind loads specified in paragraph “Wind Loads” in Part 26 (i.e., for

ASCE 7, Wind Loads – Components and Cladding).

B. Overhead Coiling (Rollup) Doors:

1. Doors shall be overhead, coiling type, with interlocking slats, complete

with anchoring and door hardware, guides, hood, and operating

mechanisms, and designed for use on openings as indicated and designed

to withstand wind loading indicated. Slats shall be continuous length for

width of door indicated, without splices. Use grease-sealed or self-

lubricating bearings for rotating members.

2. Manual Chain Hoist: Provide chain hoist operator with endless steel chain,

chain pocket wheel and guard, geared reduction unit, and chain keeper

secured to guide.

3. Door Curtain and Hood Material: Galvanized steel.

4. Insulation: Fill slats with manufacturer’s standard thermal insulation

complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of

25 and 50, respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84. Enclose

insulation completely within slate faces.

16

Simple Saver System is a registered trademark of Harkins, Daniel J., Port Charlotte, Florida.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 98 of 315


13 34 19 – 28

5. Locking Devices: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through

slots in tracks for locking by padlock (provided by Buyer), located on both

left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

6. Door-Finish: Manufacturer’s standard Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated

corrosion-resistant finish: Gray color as selected from manufacturer’s full

range for both interior curtain slat and exterior curtain slat faces.

7. Accessories:

a. Weather seals: Equip each door with weather-striping gaskets

fitted to entire perimeter of door for a weather-tight installation.

b. Push/Pull Handles: Equip the door with emergency-operated

lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door.

C. Trim: Factory-formed and factory-painted ridge cap, rake trim, simple eave trim,

panel side trim, corner trim, door trim, and other trim as necessary.

D. Gutter Fascia and Downspouts:

1. Material: ASTM A653, galvanized steel.

2. Gutter Fascia:

a. Prefinished to match wall panels.

b. Furnish hangers with factory-applied paint.

3. Preformed Corner Closures: Furnish to match configuration of gable

fascia.

4. Downspouts:

a. Configuration: Nominal 4-in. corrugated rectangular box with

minimum 11 sq. in. of cross-section area.

b. Factory finish to match wall panels.

E. Miscellaneous: Manufacturer’s standard fasteners, self-tapping screws, metal-

backed neoprene washers, weather stripping, sealants, closure strips, gaskets, and

other items as required for a complete installation.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Factory Fabricate: To manufacturer’s written standards, MBMA Low Rise

Building Systems Manual, and, for items not covered, AISC Load and Resistance

Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 99 of 315


13 34 19 – 29

B. Building Parts:

1. Accurate and true to dimension to facilitate building erection and proper

fit without cutting, fitting or other field alterations.

2. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously

prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.

3. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends.

Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of

cracks, tears, ruptures, and sharp edges.

C. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA for fabrication and erection tolerances.

D. Welded Connections: In accordance with AWS D1.1.

E. Sheet Steel: Welding in accordance with AWS D1.3.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Building will be erected around operating facilities.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify concrete foundation, floor slab, mechanical and electrical utilities, and

placed anchors are in correct position and properly squared.

B. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING

A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer’s written erection

instructions and erection drawings.

B. Use templates for accurate setting of anchor rods, as required.

C. Provide temporary bracing in accordance with MBMA standards and as required

for safe installation.

D. Ream holes requiring enlargement to admit bolts. Burned holes for bolted

connections are not permitted without written approval by the Metal Building

System manufacturer’s professional engineer.

E. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from

metal building system manufacturer’s professional engineer.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 100 of 315


13 34 19 – 30

F. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated. Erect

building frame true and level with vertical members plumb and bracing properly

installed. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.

G. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before

assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent

contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for

discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection

and mean temperature when structure will be completed and in service.

H. Provide temporary guys and bracing where needed for squaring and plumbing,

and securing the structural framing against loads such as wind loads acting on the

exposed framing.

I. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and

true to line. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting

structures.

1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to

RCSC for bolt type and joint type specified.

J. Secondary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line.

Field bolt secondary framing to clips attached to primary framing as required to

satisfy design loads and as shown on Drawings.

1. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows.

2. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including

doors, louvers, fans, and other penetrations of roof and walls.

K. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce

openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment

furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural

framing.

L. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within

those permitted by MBMA.

3.4 ROOF AND WALL PANELS

A. Install all wall and roofing systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction

and details.

B. Field Cutting of panels by torch is not permitted.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 101 of 315


13 34 19 – 31

C. Attach panels to structural supports to maintain a weather tight seal while

allowing for thermal and structural movement.

1. Install exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment.

2. Field seam side laps of standing seam roof panels using electrically-

operated seaming machine.

3. Use proper tools to install screw fasteners to compress neoprene washer

without damaging washer or stripping metal.

D. Install manufacturer’s standard joint sealants, gaskets, and closure strips as

required for weather-tight installation.

E. Field Cutting and Patching: Perform in a manner not to impair appearance,

weathertightness, or structural capacity of panel system.

3.5 DOORS AND FRAME INSTALLATION

A. General: Install doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely

fastened in place according to manufacturers’ written instructions. Coordinate

installation with wall flashings and other components. Seal perimeter of each

door frame with elastomeric sealant used for metal wall panels.

B. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate

easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as

recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight

mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with

flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly,

including trim, copings, ridge closures, seams covers, flashings, sealants,

gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including

trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers,

closure strips, and similar items.

3. Where dissimilar metal surfaces contact each other or corrosive substrates,

protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with

corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment

to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended

by manufacturer.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 102 of 315


13 34 19 – 32

B. Gutters/Downspouts:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

Join sections with riveted-and-soldered or lapped-and-sealed joints.

Attach gutters to eaves with gutter hangers spaced as required for gutter

size, but not more than 36 in. o.c., using manufacturer’s standard

fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide

for thermal expansion.

2. Downspouts: Join sections with 1 1/2-in. telescoping joints. Provide

fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 in. away from walls;

locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 in. o.c. in

between. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from

building. Install splash pads under each downspout.

C. Louvers: Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment

with adjacent work.

D. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetrations. Fasten and seal to panel

as recommended by manufacturer.

3.7 TESTING

A. After installation, perform electrical continuity check and functionally check fans

and heaters. Document testing and submit test report.

B. HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Collect the following data and include

in final report:

1. Title Page:

a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.

b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.

c. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and

Balancing Agency.

d. Project name.

e. Project location.

f. Name of TOC Construction Representative.

g. Project Subcontractor.

h. Project altitude.

i. Report date.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 103 of 315


13 34 19 – 33

2. Summary Comments:

a. Design versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of system.

c. Description of systems operation sequence.

d. Nomenclature used throughout report.

e. Test conditions.

3. Instrument List:

a. Instrument.

b. Manufacturer.

c. Model number.

d. Serial number.

e. Range.

f. Calibration date.

4. Electric Motors:

a. Manufacturer.

b. Model/Frame.

c. HP/BHP.

d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load.

e. RPM

f. Service factor.

g. Starter size, rating, heater elements.

h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 104 of 315


13 34 19 – 34

5. V-Belt Drive:

a. Identification/location.

b. Required driven RPM.

c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM.

d. Belt, size and quantity.

e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM.

f. Center to center distance.

6. Cooling Coil Data:

a. Identification/number.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Manufacturer.

e. Air flow, design and actual.

f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual.

g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual.

h. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual.

i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual.

j. Water flow, design and actual.

k. Water pressure drop, design and actual.

l. Entering water temperature, design and actual.

m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual.

n. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual.

o. Air pressure drop, design and actual.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 105 of 315


13 34 19 – 35

7. Heating Coil Data:

a. Identification/number.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Manufacturer.

e. Air flow, design and actual.

f. Water flow, design and actual.

g. Water pressure drop, design and actual.

h. Entering water temperature, design and actual.

i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual.

j. Entering air temperature, design and actual.

k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual.

l. Air pressure drop, design and actual.

8. Electric Duct Heater:

a. Manufacturer.

b. Identification/number.

c. Location.

d. Model number.

e. Design kW.

f. Number of stages and readings.

g. Phase, voltage, amperage.

h. Test voltage (each phase)

i. Test amperage (each phase).

j. Air flow, specified and actual.

k. Temperature rise, specified and actual

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 106 of 315


13 34 19 – 36

9. Air Moving Equipment (e.g., Air Handling Unit, etc.):

a. Location.

b. Manufacturer.

c. Model number.

d. Serial number.

e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge.

f. Air flow, specified and actual.

g. Return air flow, specified and actual.

h. Outside air flow, specified and actual.

i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual.

j. Inlet pressure.

k. Discharge pressure.

l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.

m. Number of Belts/Make/Size.

n. Fan RPM.

10. Duct

a. System zone/branch.

b. Duct size.

c. Area.

d. Design velocity.

e. Design air flow.

f. Test velocity.

g. Test air flow.

h. Duct static pressure.

i. Air temperature.

j. Air correction factor.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 107 of 315


13 34 19 – 37

11. Vibration Test:

a. Location of points:

i. Fan bearing, drive end.

ii. Fan bearing, opposite end.

iii. Motor bearing, center (when applicable).

iv. Motor bearing, drive end.

v. Motor bearing, opposite end.

vi. Casing (bottom or top).

vii. Casing (side).

12. Final Design Document Package.

a. Final (as-built) drawings.

b. Final (as-built) calculations.

c. Final Test Report.

13. Normally accepted readings, velocity and accelerations.

14. Unusual conditions at time of test.

3.8 REPAIR, CLEANING, AND PAINTING

A. Following erection, remove all unused material, screws, fasteners, and other

debris from completed installation. Use caution when removing metal cuttings

from surface of prefinished metal panels.

B. Replace damaged, dented, buckled, or discolored metal panels.

C. Repair damaged, painted, and galvanized surfaces.

3.9 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. Provide manufacturer’s representative at Site, for installation assistance,

inspection, and certification of proper installation.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 108 of 315


13 34 19 – Att. 1–1


HVAC DESIGN LOADS

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 109 of 315


13 34 19 – Att. 1–2

HVAC Design Loads

Miscellaneous Electrical Loads:

1) 40 hp drive on hot water skids (1 per skid) – 764 Watts

2) 7.5 HP drive on water skid – 267 Watts

3) Heater control cabinet SCR’s (1 per skid, 1.5 Watts/Amp) – 2500 Watts

4) Led lighting fixtures 10.7 Watts/fixture 24 fixtures – 256 watts

5) Miscellaneous power supplies, HMI Panel, equipment contactors, switchgear equipment

– 500 Watts

END OF ATTACHMENT 1

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 110 of 315


13 47 13.13 – 1

SECTION 13 47 13.13

CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR UNDERGROUND AND SUBMERGED PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes requirements for materials, installation, and repair to

underground cathodic protection systems.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS/CODES AND STANDARDS

Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this section.

The following documents and other referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the


of this Section, unless otherwise indicated.

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM B8-11 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded

Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

ASTM D1248-12 Standard Specifications for Polyethylene Plastics

Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable, Type 1,

Class A, Category 5, Grades E4 & E5


H-2-94086, Rev. 2 Cathodic Protection Details, Cables, Boxes &

Jumpers

H-14-011500 Tank Farm Cathodic Protection General Notes &

Details

C. NACE International (NACE)

SP0169-2013 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or

Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

SP0285-2011 Corrosion Control of Underground Storage Tank

Systems by Cathodic ProtectionSP0286-2007

Electrical Isolation of Cathodically

Protected Pipelines

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 111 of 315


13 47 13.13 – 2

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 486C Splicing Wire Connectors

UL 510 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and

Rubber Insulating Tape

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Not Used.


A. The installation shall conform to the National Electrical Code, applicable local

codes, and Standard Practices (SP) of NACE, SP0285, SP0286, and SP0169.

B. Electrical/Electronic Product Acceptability: Provide labeling and documentation

in accordance with the Statement of Work and Section 26 05 53, “Identification

for Electrical Systems.”

C. Misrepresented Products: See the Statement of Work for required measures to

prevent use of misrepresented products.

1.5 PERMITS




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MATERIALS

A. 3M™17

Scotchkote™17

Electrical coating or equivalent.

17

3M, Schotch, Scotchcast, Scotchfil, Scotchkote, Skotchlok, and Scotchrap are trademarks of 3M Company,

St. Paul, Minnesota.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 112 of 315


13 47 13.13 – 3

B. Test Station Boxes: Gerome 2007 Box, or equivalent as required, as depicted on

H-14-011500.

C. Anode Junction Boxes: 16” x 16” NEMA 4 Enclosure per H-14-011500.

D. Plastic Warning Tape:

1. Plastic warning tape for horizontal runs of buried leads in cable trenches

shall be a minimum of 4-mils thick and 6-inches wide inert, yellow, plastic

film designed for prolonged use underground. The tape shall have the

words, “CAUTION CATHODIC PROTECTION CABLE BELOW,” or

similar, clearly visible in repeating patterns along its entire length.

2. Plastic warning tape for anodes shall be buried according to H-14-011500.

E. Conductors:

1. Direct buried: High Molecular Weight Polyethylene (HMWPE) Cathodic

Protection Cables: 600 Volts, Single Conductor, Stranded Copper cable

for direct burial, No. 2-AWG. Conductor shall conform to ASTM B8-11.

Insulation shall conform to ASTM D1248-12. Size specified on the

Drawings

2. Conduit run: No. 2-AWG stranded THHN wire.

3. Bonding: Type “CP” wire, No. 4 AWG, or as shown on drawings.

4. Anode header and loop: Type “CP” wire, No. 2 AWG, or as shown on

drawings.

F. Anode

1. Canistered Wire Anode: De Nora LIDA®18

Pack canistered wire anode,

Model LP 3 X 40H with at least 1.4 amp output or equivalent.

G. Conductor Pin Brazing

1. For New and Old Pipe: Follow manufacturer’s instructions. See

H-14-011500 for applicable detail.

a. Pin Brazing Power and Control Unit.

b. Pin Brazing Consumables per manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Brazing Coating

18

LIDA is registered trademark of De Nora Tech, Inc., Chardon, Ohio.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 113 of 315


13 47 13.13 – 4

a. Royston®19

Handy Cap IP, Integrated primer or approved

substitute per manufacturer’s instructions.

H. Repair Coating: Sherwin Williams SEAGUARD MP (see Section 09 91 00,

“Painting,” for product details).

1. Power tool clean the area per manufacturer’s recommendations before

coating application.

2. Brush or roll application is acceptable for repairs.

I. Splice Kit, Conductor:

1. Cadweld®20

CASS Type cable splice kit, by Erico Products, or approved

substitute. Suffix based on conductor size.

2. Cadweld CATA Type cable splice kit, by Erico Products, or approved

substitute. Suffix based on conductor size.

3. Epoxy potting compound for encapsulating electrical wire splices or

terminated wires buried underground (for use as required), 3M Company,

Scotchcast™17

Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, 85-10, or approved

substitute.

J. Tape, Electrical Insulating

1. Scotch™17

rubber splicing tape #23

2. Scotch electrical tape #33

a. Plastic: UL 510, 3/4-inch wide.

b. Self-vulcanizing: UL 510, 3/4-inch wide.

K. 3M Scotchkote Electrical Coating FD.

L. Touch-up compound for PVC Conduit Coating: Material of Contractor’s choice.

M. Wire marker: Tubular plastic, imprinted or typed with indelible ink, or plastic tag

typed with indelible ink, fastened securely to wire with plastic wire tie.

19

Royston is a registered trademark of Chase Corporation, Bridgewater, Massachusetts. 20

Cadweld is a registered trademark of Erico International Corporation, Solon, Ohio.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 114 of 315


13 47 13.13 – 5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Scale dimensions on the drawings show desired and

approximate location of equipment, actual locations, distances, and levels shall be

governed by field conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. The Contractor shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials and supplies,

and shall perform all labor required to provide complete corrosion control

systems in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70, the Specifications, and the

Drawings.

3. Use appropriate calibrated special tools when installing devices for which

manufacturer recommends special installation tools.

4. Refer to Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill,” for excavation or

backfill of soil.

B. Test Station: Install below grade test stations per design.

C. Junction boxes

1. Install junction boxes according to design. Junction box details located on

H-14-011500.

2. Label boxes according to design.

3. Conductor labels should indicate where the cables originate from (e.g.,

A241-CATH-RECT-015, J 42-5, etc.)

D. Wire pull box

1. Install junction boxes according to design. Wire pull box detail located on

H-14-011500.

E. Conductors

1. Test Stations

a. Wire brush to remove surface contaminants and mechanically

grind or file pipe at connection location to bare metal surface, free

of oil and dirt. Note: Enough pipe surface should be prepared to

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 115 of 315


13 47 13.13 – 6

accommodate the corrosion protection product to be applied after

the connection is complete. Make pin brazing of conductors to

pipe in accordance with approved manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Where two or more wires are brazed to the metallic structure, the

minimum spacing between the connections shall be 6 inches.

c. Inspect pin brazing connections for mechanical integrity in


d. Install the cables with sufficient slack so that the cable insulation

and conductors will not be damaged during backfill operations or

ground or structure movement. As required, cables should be

secured with duct tape or tie wraps during pipe trench activity and

backfill operations to prevent stress on the brazed area.

e. Apply approved coatings on all exposed copper wire, connector

material, and bared pipe. Overlap approved coating on copper

wire insulation on pipe coating or on bared surface a minimum of

1 inch.

f. Use conductors as specified on H-14-011500, Table 1, Test Station

Conductors.

g. Repair damaged pipe test conductor wires by cleaning and

removing any fraying insulation. Roughen up outer insulation for

approximately 4” each side of the defect with utility knife to

prepare for application of tapes. Using two (2) half-lapped layers

of Scotch rubber splicing # 23 tape and two (2) half-lapped layers

of Scotch electrical #33 plus tape, start from the center of the

defect to ensure a double wrap of each layer. Apply 3M

Scotchkote Electrical Coating FD over taped repair prior to

backfill.

h. Make connections to existing conductor wires using a Cadweld

CASS type connector, Burndy®21

Type mechanical connector, or

appropriately sized copper split bolt per manufacturer’s

instructions, and encase splice point in a 3M Company, Scotchcast

Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, Model 85-10 (or equivalent).

Note: ALL buried wire splices must be completely encased in a

3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, Model

85-10 (or equivalent) prior to burial.

i. New conductor wires shall be sufficient length to extend from the

point of installation on the pipeline (or the severed cable

connection), to the new test station.

21

Burndy is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Shelton, Connecticut.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 116 of 315


13 47 13.13 – 7

j. Wires to be direct buried in the ground shall be laid straight

without kinks.

k. Identify end of each conductor using specified wire marker with

typewritten or imprinted pipe number to which conductor is

connected.

l. Newly installed test station(s): Identify the end of each pipe test

conductor using specified wiremarker with typewritten or

imprinted pipe number to which conductor is connected.

m. Terminate conductors on specified terminals and locations in test

station as directed in H-14-011500, Detail 2, and the test station

matrices located on the appropriate cathodic protection farm

drawings. (Note test station matrices are located on drawings

starting with H-14-0315XX).

n. Backfill in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and

Fill.”

2. Jumpers

a. Wire brush to remove surface containments and mechanically

grind or file pipe at connection location to white metal surface, free

of oil and dirt. Note: Enough pipe surface should be prepared to

accommodate the corrosion protection product to be applied after

the connection is complete. Make pin brazing connection of

jumpers to pipe in accordance with approved manufacturer’s

instructions.

b. Where two or more wires are connected to the metallic structure,

the minimum spacing between the connections shall be 6 inches.

c. Inspect pin brazing connections for mechanical integrity in


d. Install the cables with sufficient slack so that the cable insulation

and conductors will not be damaged during backfill operations or

ground or structure movement. As required, cables should be

secured with duct tape or tie wraps during pipe trench activity and

backfill operations to prevent stress on the weld area.

e. Apply approved coating on all exposed copper wire, connection

material, and bared pipe. Overlap approved coating on copper

wire insulation on pipe coating or on bared surface a minimum of

1 inch. Smooth weld coating manually with brush.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 117 of 315


13 47 13.13 – 8

f. Repair damaged bonding conductor wires by cleaning and

removing any fraying insulation. Roughen up outer insulation for

approximately 4” each side of the defect with utility knife to

prepare for application of tapes. Using two (2) half-lapped layers

of Scotch rubber splicing # 23 tape and two (2) half-lapped layers

of Scotch electrical #33 plus tape, start from the center of the

defect to ensure a double wrap of each layer. Apply 3M

Scotchkote Electrical Coating FD over taped repair prior to

backfill.

g. New conductor wires shall be sufficient length to extend from the

points of installation on the pipelines. Splices, if required, shall be

made using a Cadweld CASS type connector, Burndy Type

mechanical connector, or appropriately sized copper split bolt per

manufacturer’s instructions, and encase splice point in a 3M

Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, Model 85-10

(or equivalent). Note: ALL buried wire splices must be completely

encased in a 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing

Kit, Model 85-10 (or equivalent) prior to burial.

h. Wires buried in the ground shall be laid straight without kinks.

i. Bond per H-2-94086, Details 3 and 5.

3. Anode header, loop, and lead cables

a. Anode header cables located in above ground conduit will be a

single cable, i.e., no loop, routed in two directions towards anode

junction boxes. Cables will run through wire pull box, and will

terminate at anode junction boxes on either end of the conduit rack.

Direct buried UHMWPE wires will land in junction boxes, and

continue below grade for anode connections.

b. If damaged, repair or replace per drawing H-14-011500.

c. Terminate new header at rectifier 241A-CATH-RECT-015 positive

output terminals. The header loop cables will terminate at final

anode junction boxes per design.

d. Terminate new negative return cables at rectifier 241A-CATH-

RECT-015 negative output terminal. Use solderless terminal lugs

for conductor terminations. Identify cables using specified wire

markers.

F. Existing Anodes

1. Replace existing anodes if damaged or depleted.

2. Repair damaged head, leader, or loop cables according to H-14-011500.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 118 of 315


13 47 13.13 – 9

3. If the anode is required to be removed and does not need to be replaced,

ensure that terminated anode leader cable is fully encapsulated in the 85-

14-CP splice kit.

G. New Anodes: Install per manufactures instructions and drawing H-14-011500.

Run anode lead cable in field as required. Specify anode and lead wire

installation locations.

1. Vertical.

2. Horizontal.

3.3 FINAL TESTING

A. Construction Acceptance Testing will be directed as required by the cathodic

protection Design Authorities (DAs), Rick Nelson or Ryler Adams.

B. Start-Up Testing will be directed as required by the cathodic protection DAs,

Rick Nelson or Ryler Adams.


A. Continuity Testing

1. Testing will be directed by the cathodic protection DAs, Rick Nelson or

Ryler Adams.

B. Connections

1. Document connection of conductors to new and existing pipe. Include the

following:

a. Bonding jumper: Identification of each pipe to which connected

and general location of jumper and splice connection as applicable.

b. Verification that connections complies with manufacturer’s

installation and inspection requirements.

END OF SECTION 13 47 13.13

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 119 of 315


22 15 00 – 1

SECTION 22 15 00

COMPRESSED AIR PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of compressed air service piping

inside the Air and Water Service Building.







A. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical

Engineers (ANSI/ASME)

ANSI/ASME B13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASME B&PVC, 2013 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualification

ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch

ASME B16.3 Malleable Iron and Threaded Fittings

ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings

ASME B16.34 Valves -Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End

ASME B31.9, 2014 Building Services Piping

C. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 120 of 315


22 15 00 – 2

D. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM A182 Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy

and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings,

and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service



Pipes

ASTM A351 Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for

Pressure-Containing Parts


AWS D1.1, 2010 Structural Welding Code

AWS D1.6, 2007 Structural Welding Code – Stainless


F. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society (MSS)

MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design,

Manufacture, Selection, Application, and

Installation

MSS SP-97 Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings

– Socket Welding, Threaded and Buttwelding Ends

G. Hanford Documents


TFC-ENG-STD-12 Tank Farm Equipment Identification Numbering

and Labeling Standard


1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and or Standard Welding

Procedure Specifications (SWPSs): Five days before first use submit

WPSs and/or SWPSs in accordance with Paragraph 1.4.B.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 121 of 315


22 15 00 – 3

2. Welding Personnel Qualifications: Five days before start of fabrication

submit welder qualification as required by Paragraph 1.4.B.

3. Examination Documentation: Five days before start of fabrication submit

documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A for information/record.

4. Mechanical Cleaning Verification: Submit documentation in accordance

with Paragraph 3.3.B for information/record.

5. Weld Examinations: Submit documentation in accordance with Paragraph

3.5.A.

6. Pressure and Leak Testing and Certification: Five days before pressure

testing submit testing procedure in accordance with Paragraphs 1.4.C and

3.4.B.




B. Qualifications

1. Structural Welding Personnel and Procedures shall be in accordance with

Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

2. Welding Personnel and Procedures for Pressure-Retaining Components

(along with attachment thereto and pipe supports) shall be qualified in

accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 927.6 before welding. Maintain

copies of welding procedure, specification, and procedure qualification

records at jobsite.

C. Pressure Testing Procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this

Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at jobsite.

D. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors

(CWIs) who have received certification (current or previous certification) in

accordance with AWS QC1.

E. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be certified

in accordance with approved procedure, which shall meet the requirements of

ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.

F. Examination Procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with

ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at the jobsite.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 122 of 315


22 15 00 – 4

1.5 PERMITS




PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Piping and Fittings: See details specified on the Drawings and in the individual

components list below.

B. Overhead Pipe Supports: B-Line B3100C (plastic coated standard clevis hangers)

or equivalent. Hanger Rods shall be threaded both ends, or continuous threaded

rods of circular cross section. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and

hangers. No wire, chain, or perforated straps are allowed. See location specified

in the Drawings. Add ceiling cross beams as necessary.

C. Close nipples are not permitted unless shown on the Drawings.

D. Pipe Joint Sealant (Lubricant) for Threaded Joints: Use anaerobic acrylic sealer.

Henkel Corporation: Loctite®22

5452 or 567 or engineering approved equivalent.

Clean threads and apply according to manufacturer’s specification.

E. Valves: Specified in individual components list section below, unless otherwise

shown on the Drawings.

F. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor

Bolts.” Anchorage must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.

G. Paint: See Section 09 91 00, “Painting” and as specified on the Drawings.

H. Deleted.

22

Loctite is a registered trademark of Henkel Corporation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 123 of 315


22 15 00 – 5

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Compressor: Kobelco KNW A00-D/H positive displacement, two-stage rotary

screw air compressor capable of delivering 100% oil-free air at 162 ACFM at

125 PSIG. The regulating system shall be a full load/no load type. A single point

of connection shall be provided for 480 VAC, 3 phase interface. The single point

of connection shall have a disconnecting means that is lockable and will isolate all

power to the compressor when opened.

B. Air Receiver Tank: Compressed air tank shall be designed and constructed in

accordance with ASME B&PVC, Section VIII, Division I for compressed air

storage use. Tank shall have a capacity of 240 gallons, a maximum working

pressure of 200 psi at 400°F, and dimensions of 30” outer diameter by 84” length.

Exterior surface painted with one coat standard shop primer. Manufacturer and

part number: Manchester Tank – 302428.

C. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) for Receiver Tank: The PRV for the compressed air

line and the 1” PRV discharge piping and components are safety significant. PRV

shall be a Consolidated Model 1/2-19110LcF-2-CC-MS-34-MT-FT-GS, with an

orifice area of 0.110 in², with a 1/2” MNPT inlet and a 1” FNPT outlet, with 316

Stainless wteel trim, and a rated flow of 319 scfm at 150 psig and 60°F. PRV

shall be ASME code stamped and set at 150 psig per RPP-CALC-60082, “Air

Compressor Pressure Relief Valve Sizing Calculation.” A code stamp and code

data report shall be provided. All safety significant components shall be

purchased from an evaluated supplier or commercial grade dedicated prior to

installation. Fabricator shall submit CMTR’s for all safety significant materials

including weld filler metal except those supplied as GFE.

D. Pressure Indicators: Pressure gauges shall be Stainless Steel, 0 – 300 psi range

with a 4 1/2” dial size and with a 1/2” MNPT bottom inlet fitting. Accuracy shall

be to ASME B40.1 Grade 1A (1%). Part number shall be a Ashcroft 45-1109-

SD-04L-0/300#.

E. Temperature Indicator: Thermometer shall be a bi-metal, Stainless Steel, 3” Dial

50° to 400°F, 1/2” MNPT inlet, 2.5” lower stem. Manufacturer and part number:

Ashcroft 30-CI-60-L-025 50/400°F

F. Regulator: Air pressure regulator shall be a 2” NPT high flow regulator rated to a

maximum pressure rating of 300 psig, able to regulate down to at least 10 psig,

and an air flow rate of 1000 SCFM. Manufacturer and part number: Jordan

Valve Model MK 60, part number 60200S6/PTS6BB34S6SM. Regulator shall be

designed in accordance with ASME B16.34.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 124 of 315


22 15 00 – 6

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surfaces to receive protective coating shall be clean, free of moisture, oil, dirt,

scale, rust, and other foreign material.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Valve Orientation:

1. Install valves as shown on Drawings where clearly illustrated.

2. Where orientation is not well illustrated, locate and orient valve to provide

accessibility for control and maintenance.

3. Valves shall be installed such that they are not used as means of support

for runs of piping or other components.

4. Ball valves shall be installed such that, when open, the handle of the ball

valve is inline with the piping. The handle shall be turned clockwise to

close the valve.

B. Identification:

1. Install Stainless Steel tag for each component in this Specification, bearing

the tag number shown in the Piping and Instrumentation Diagram. The

tag number shall be 1/4-in. die-stamped lettering.

2. Piping Identification: Identify piping systems as to fluid carried and

direction of flow as specified in ANSI/ASME B13.1 and also

Attachment 1 of Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping.”

C. Piping:

1. Fabricate and install pipe in accordance with ASME B31.9, the Drawings,

and this Section.

2. Cut pipe using methods that result in clean, straight cuts.

3. Ream pipe to nominal inside diameter after cutting. Remove burrs from

threads before assembly.

4. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint sealant specified. Apply

sealant sparingly to male threads only.

5. Keep piping systems clean. Once fabrication has started, plug or cap ends

of piping when installation is not in progress. Cap or plug openings in

fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system. Leave

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 125 of 315


22 15 00 – 7

ends of spare lines capped or blind flanged when installation has been

completed.

6. Alignment: Distortion or cold springing of piping to bring it into

alignment for joint assembly that introduces a strain in piping components

is prohibited.

7. Pipe supports: Locate and install as shown on the Drawings. Fabricate in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and Section 05 50 00, “Metal

Fabrications,” and with applicable recommended procedures of

MSS SP-58.

8. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete

Anchor Bolts.”

9. Deleted.

10. Deleted.

D. Welding:

1. Weld piping attachments to pressure-retaining components in accordance

with ASME B31.9.

2. Use of backing rings is not permitted.

3. Complete piping welds before tie-in welds to fixed items.

4. Weld steel structural elements in accordance with AWS D1.1 or D1.6.


A. Testing Preparation

1. Furnish equipment and instruments required to perform mechanical

cleaning.

B. Cleaning

1. After examination is complete and before pressure testing system, or

before connecting system into existing systems, clean piping internal

surfaces by mechanical cleaning.

2. Mechanical cleaning: Remove loose dirt, scale, and debris by brushing,

wiping, high-pressure water jetting, blowing compressed air, or other

mechanical method approved by the TOC Construction Representative

until there is no visible dirt, scale, or debris.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 126 of 315


22 15 00 – 8

a. Remove all water upon completion of high-pressure water jetting

or other mechanical cleaning method utilizing water.

b. Use drain taps at low point of piping system to ensure complete

drainage and drying. Cap lines or reconnect to system to maintain

cleanliness.

3. Provide documented evidence that flushing or mechanical cleaning has

been accomplished as specified in this Section.


A. Nondestructive Examination (NDE) of Welds

1. Perform examination for individual pipe sections as listed below in

Paragraph 3.5. Acceptance Criteria, unless otherwise noted by design,

shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Visual examination (VT): Perform in accordance with ASME B31.9,

Paragraph 936.

3. Examination Documentation:

a. Document examination of pressure containment welds for piping

systems on weld examination and test record. Record weld

identification drawings, weld numbers, welder identification,

welding procedure numbers, weld filler material, visual

examinations, NDEs, and notation of satisfactory completion of

pressure testing in accordance with instructions on form.

b. Required examinations shall be completed and documented before

starting leak testing.

c. Weld Examination and Test Record information may be

incorporated on a single format or traveler for a specific work

package.

d. Document examination of attachment welds to pressure-retaining

components by recording on sketches or Weld Examination and

Test Record.

B. Pressure and Leak Testing

1. After completion of mechanical cleaning and NDE, perform leak testing

of pipe in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Section. Use calibrated

gages with an accuracy of ± 1 psi.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 127 of 315


22 15 00 – 9

2. Document testing of each piping system on Pressure Test Certification.

Use separate forms to describe and record each piping system. Under

“Description,” describe piping system in enough detail for correlation to

weld identification drawings, and Drawings, as applicable. For systems

tested segmentally, indicate continuity in “Description” to ensure that

entire systems have been tested.

3. Pipe joints and connections to be tested shall be visible and accessible

during tests.

4. Install one temporary relief valve during testing to protect piping against

over-pressurization. Tag each relief valve used to show serial number,

inspector, date, and pressure setting.

5. Install necessary restraining devices, before applying test pressure, to

prevent distortion or displacement of piping. Remove temporary

restraining devices following testing.

6. Isolate instruments and other items which could be damaged by test

pressures.

7. Visually examine piping joints, fittings, and other potential leak sources,

including welds that attach wear plates, anchors, etc., to piping systems,

during testing.

3.5 SCHEDULES

A. Schedule of Pipe Weld NDE/Testing

NDE/NDT Method “Compressed Air”

Legend:

A. All completed welds to have visual

examination by AWS QC1 qualified weld

inspector in accordance with ASME B31.9,

Paragraph 936.4.1.

B. Pneumatic pressure test all joints.

Visual A

Fit

Root Pass

Cover Pass A

Liquid Penetrant

Root Pass

Cover Pass

Magnetic Particle

Root Pass

Cover Pass

Radiographic

Completed Weld

Ultrasonic

Completed Weld

Pressure

All Joints B

Other

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 128 of 315


22 15 00 – 10

B. Components List

Compressed Air

Service Max Operating Pressure

(psig)

Test Pressure

(psig)

Max Operating Temp

(°F)

Process Air

(PA) 150 225 +10/-0 150

Sizes 3/4 in. and smaller 1 in. and larger

Pipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP304L, seamless

Wall Thickness Schedule 80S. Schedule 40S and Schedule 80S (only if

indicated as threaded on the Drawings).

Nipples Schedule 80S. Schedule 80S.

Fittings Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000, socket weld or threaded in

accordance with ASME B16.11.

Branch Fittings Integrally reinforced Stainless Steel in accordance with MSS SP-97.

O-ring Unions 304L Stainless Steel, Socket Weld or Threaded, EPDM o-ring, Class 3000,

Manufacturer: Hart Industries.

Valves – Gate None. Stainless Steel body ASTM A351, Class 200, OS&Y bonnet, flexible or solid

wedge disc, socket weld ends, Powell

Figure 2490

Valves – Ball Stainless Steel body ASTM A351 Gr CF8M, Full port, threaded end connections in

accordance with ASME B1.20.1, socket weld ends in accordance with ASME

B16.11, Tekfil seat, Flowtek series 7000.

Valves – Check None. Spring-assisted, non-slam, in-line, socket

weld, 750 CWP, ASTM A351 Gr CF8M

Body, 316 stainless spring, Zelon®23

O-ring, DFT®23

Inc. Model SCV.


23

Zelon and DFT is a registered trademark of DFT, Inc., Exton, Pennsylvania.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 129 of 315


23 31 01 – 1

SECTION 23 31 01

TANK VENTILATION DUCTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes waste retrieval tank ventilation ductwork and housing assembly

installation, cleaning, inspection, and testing.








ASME AG-1, 2012 Code on Nuclear Air and Gas Treatment


ASNT SNT-TC-1A Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A and

ASNT Standard Topical Outlines for Qualification

of Nondestructive Testing Personnel

C. Hanford Documents

H-14-109924 241-AX Ventilation Site Plan

OSD-T151-00013 Operating Specifications for Single-Shell Waste

Storage Tanks

TFC-ENG-STD-07 Ventilation System Design Standard

RPP-CALC-57515 AX-Farm Tank Exhaust System Duct Loss and

Performance Curve

RPP-CALC-57516 AG-1 Duct Volume, Pressure Test Criteria

Calculation

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 130 of 315


23 31 01 – 2

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. No variation of duct configuration is permitted except by the approved design

documents.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Documented in work package or fabrication document as applicable.


A. Construct ductwork in accordance with design documentation.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with

minimum 3 years’ ASME AG-1 experience.

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Comply with Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 DUCT MATERIAL

A. Duct and housing materials must be in accordance with design documentation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and support ductwork and housing assemblies in accordance with design

documents and Contract Statement of Work.

B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal and taped polyethylene

over open ductwork and housings to prevent foreign matter from entering

ductwork system.

C. Install flexible connection with minimum 1-in. slack immediately adjacent to

equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 131 of 315


23 31 01 – 3

3.2 CLEANING

A. During system installation, wipe/clean the interior surfaces of all ducts, housings,

and components as required to remove dust and debris.

3.3 DUCT LEAKAGE

A. Inspect and test assembled duct and housing systems. Joints that are not testable

after field installation (such as riser connections, adapter assemblies between the

tank and tank isolation valve) that were tested after fabrication testing do not

require testing.

B. Perform visual inspections and leak testing in accordance with ASME AG-1.

Test parameters are shown in Table 3.3B.

Note: Do not disassemble Inlet Assembly or Ductwork after testing is complete.

If the assemblies are disassembled for any reason, they must be retested.

Table 3.3B: Ventilation Ductwork Test Parameters for POR1268 and POR127

9

Component Test Description Test Parameter

Exhaust Ductwork

Assembly

Pressure Decay Test of Entire System, Leak Rate

with Exhauster

18 scfm (max)1,8,9

Pressure Decay Test of Entire System, Leak Rate

Without Exhauster

15 scfm (max)2,8,9

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Rate for Moisture

Separator Only

0.327 scfm (max)3

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Rate for Individual Duct

Components4

See RPP-CALC-57516

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Pressure -40.0 ± 1 in wg.5

Tank Air Inlet Assembly

(w/o Vacuum Controller)

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Rate 3.7 scfm (max)6

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Pressure -3 + 1 in wg.7

1Based on Table SA-B-1310, ASME AG-1, (0.6% times flow rate or 3000 scfm).

2Based on Table SA-B-1310, ASME AG-1, (0.5% times flow rate or 3000 scfm).

3Based on RPP-CALC-57516, Table 1.

4Any combination of the duct sections can be tested at the same time as long as the total leak rate from all

sections does not exceed 15 scfm. 5Based on 125% of maximum fan pressure, see VI-50645.

6Based on Table SA-B-1310, ASME AG-1, (0.5% times flow rate or 745 scfm), see RPP-CALC-57515.

7Based on 125% of -2.4 in. w.g. Limit in OSD-T151-00013.

8Tests using POR126 require valve AX241-VTP-V-005 to be shut prior to execution of test.

9Tests using POR127 require valve AX241-VTP-V-001 to be shut prior to execution of test.

C. Remake any leaking joints and repeat test. Record results on a new data sheet.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 132 of 315


23 31 13 – 1

SECTION 23 31 13

AIR COMPRESSOR METAL DUCTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes ventilation ductwork and duct sealing for the exhaust cooling air

of the Air and Water Service Building 241-A-285 air compressor unit.



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.






ASTM A90 Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of

Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or

Zinc-Alloy Coatings




B. American Welding Society (AWS)


AWS D1.3, 2008 Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel

AWS D9.1 Sheet Metal Welding Code

C. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS)

MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 133 of 315


23 31 13 – 2


NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning

and Ventilating Systems

E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)

SMACNA 1520 Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards

SMACNA 1922 Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards

HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and

Flexible

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 181A Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts


A. Construct ductwork in accordance with SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction

Standards – Metal and Flexible, and NFPA 90A.


A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming

quality, having G90 zinc coating in conformance with ASTM A90.

B. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.

C. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36 steel.

2.2 WALL LOUVER

A. The exhaust louver shall be of corrosion resistant metal, or suitably finished to

resist corrosion.

B. Size, and location shall be as shown on drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 134 of 315


23 31 13 – 3

2.3 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Fabricate ductwork, duct access doors, and support in accordance with SMACNA

HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible. Furnish duct material,

gages, reinforcing, and sealing for design pressure class indicated.

B. Construct T’s, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1 1/2 times centerline

duct width.

C. Provide, at minimum, rectangular 45 degree entry fittings for rectangular ducts.

D. Duct sizes noted are inside clear dimensions. No variation of duct configuration

or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is permitted except

by written permission from the Buyer’s Technical Representative. Round ducts

installed in place of rectangular ducts shall be sized in accordance with ASHRAE

table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.

E. Increase duct size gradually, not exceeding 15 degree divergence wherever

possible. Do not exceed 30-degree divergence upstream of equipment. Do not

exceed 45-degree convergence downstream of equipment.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install hangers and supports for ducting as necessary.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify sizes of equipment connection before fabricating transitions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install, seal, and support ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct

Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible.

B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on

open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

C. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

D. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating

and maintenance activities.

E. Repair damaged galvanized ductwork surfaces (welds, scratches, etc.) by applying

minimum 2 coats of a zinc base paint.

F. Install wall louver as shown on drawings and according to manufacturer’s

instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 135 of 315


23 31 13 – 4

3.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes is permitted except by written

permission from engineering.

B. The ductwork provided per this Specification shall interface with the HVAC

Systems procured via the design drawings.

C. Any proposed changes to existing equipment to facilitate installation of the

ductwork shall be discussed with and approved by the Owner prior to proceeding.

D. All indoor supply ductwork shall be flanged in spool piece sizes, as determined by

installation contractor, to accommodate field obstructions and installation

limitations.

E. No welding is allowed within the facility or to existing structures within the

facility. All ductwork and supports shall accommodate this requirement in the

design.

F. As much as field conditions allow, slope all horizontal duct runs away from the

air compressor unit. Slope shall be a minimum of 1/16” per foot.

3.4 DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASSIFICATION

A. Construct ducting for a minimum pressure classification of 1.5 in. w.g.

3.5 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints in accordance to the duct pressure classification as

described in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible.

B. Seal joints between duct sections and duct seams with welds, gaskets, mastic

adhesives, mastic plus embedded fabric systems, or tape.

1. Sealants, Mastics and Tapes: Conform to UL 181A. Provide products

bearing appropriate UL 181A markings.

2. Do not use sealing products not bearing UL approval markings.

C. Do not use pressure-sensitive sealant on ducts with a pressure class of 1 in. w.g.

or greater.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 136 of 315


26 05 19 – 1

SECTION 26 05 19

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Building wire (600V).

B. TC cable (2000V and 600V).

C. Wire and cable connectors.

D. Insulating tape and tubing.

E. Wire pulling lubricant.

1.2 REFERENCES






A. American Standards for Testing and materials (ASTM)

ASTM B3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper

Wire

ASTM D3005 Standard Specification for Low-Temperature

Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive

Electrical Insulating Tape

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code (NEC)

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

IEEE 422 IEEE Guide for the Design and Installation of Cable

Systems in Power Generating Stations

IEEE 1210 Standard Tests for Determining Compatibility of

Cable-Pulling Lubricants with Wire and Cable

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 137 of 315


26 05 19 – 2

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 44 Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors


UL 486D Sealed Wire Connector Systems

UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber

Insulating Tape

UL 1277 Standard for Electrical Power and Control Tray

Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members

1.3 SUBMITTALS




2. Deleted.

C. Approval Not Required

1. Deleted.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

Not used.


A. Comply with the NEC for components and installation.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory (NRTL) for the application and environment in which installed.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products according to manufacturer’s

instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 138 of 315


26 05 19 – 3

1.7 PERMITS


1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

Not used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Refer to the Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 WIRE

A. Provide NRTL-listed building wire as shown on the Drawings with the following

characteristics:

1. Description: Single conductor 600V, 90°C insulated wire.

2. Conductor:

a. 98% conductivity, annealed, uncoated copper (per ASTM B3)

solid or stranded as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

3. Insulation: The following types, rated 600V:

a. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: 1 AWG and smaller,

Type THHN/THWN-2 per UL 83.

b. 1/0 AWG and larger, Type XHHW per UL 44.

B. Multi-conductor portable power cables shall be 600V rated for extra hard usage

Type G or W per NEC Article 400 Table 400.4, Note 4 and shall be rated for sun

light, damp, and wet locations and contain a green insulated equipment-grounding

conductor.

C. Multi-conductor portable control cables shall be 600V extra hard usage such as

Type SOW per NEC Article 400 Table 400.4, Note 4 and be rated for sun light,

damp, and wet locations and contain a green insulated equipment-grounding

conductor.

D. Signal cables shall be 600V Type SOOW per NEC Article 400 Table 400.4,

Note 4 and be rated for sun light and wet locations and contain a braid shield or

drain wire.

E. Heat trace cable shall be the self-regulating type as shown on the drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 139 of 315


26 05 19 – 4

F. Color code conductors as follows:

1. Use colored insulation for color coding conductors 6 AWG and smaller.

2. Use water and oil resistant colored plastic adhesive tape, 3/4 in. minimum

width, for color coding conductor 4 AWG and larger.

Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 35”

3. Provide black conductor insulation where colored tape is used for color

coding.

4. Use the following color codes for AC power system conductors:

Conductor Color Codes

System

Voltage:

Conductor:

480Y/277V

208Y/120V

120/240V

Phase A: Red Black Black

Phase B: Yellow Purple Brown

Phase C: Blue Brown ---

Grounded

(Neutral):

White/Gray White/Gray White/Gray

Equipment

Grounding:

Green Green Green

Isolated

Ground:

--- --- ---

Switched: Purple Pink Blue

5. Use the following color codes for DC power system conductors:

Positive: Red

Negative: Black

6. Provide color code for control conductors as indicated on equipment or

control system manufacturer’s drawings.

2.3 TC-ER CABLE

A. Provide tray cable (Type TC-ER) that complies with UL 1277, the NEC, and this

Section.

B. TC-ER cable shall be rated 90°C, minimum of 600V insulation rating, UL listed,

sunlight and weather resistant, rated for direct burial and rated for variable

frequency drive (VFD) use where specified on the drawings. TC cable rated for

VFD use shall have a 2,000V insulation rating.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 140 of 315


26 05 19 – 5

C. Provide TC-ER cables with quantities and sizes (minimum 12 AWG) of

conductors as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Provide TC-ER cable rated for VFD as shown on the Drawings.

E. TC-ER cable manufacturer: General Cable or equal.

2.4 CABLE PROTECTORS

A. Cable Protectors: Where cables require protection from vehicle or pedestrian

traffic, use a cable protector such as Yellow Jacket®24

, Bumblebee®24

, or Cable

Guard®24

. Cable Guard or other engineering approved protection shall be used at

vehicle and crane crossings.

2.5 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 8 AWG and smaller, use Pressure type,

or spring type rated for use with copper conductors with insulating caps or covers

rated for 600V and 105°C that are NRTL-listed to UL 486C. Thomas and Betts

Corporation “Sta-Kon®25

,” 3M Company “Scotchlok™17

,” or approved

substitute, where required by the NEC.

B. For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 6 AWG through 1 AWG, use the

following materials:

1. Tin-plated copper split-bolt connectors that meet the requirements in

UL 486A-486B; provide with matching 600V snap-on insulating cover.

Manufacturer: FCI Burndy “Type KSA” with “Type SC” insulating

cover.

2. Multi-tap connectors that meet the requirements of UL 486A-486B that

have two or more range-taking mechanical lugs and matching 600V

insulated cover. Manufacturers: Burndy ‘POLYTAP” or “UNITAP,”

Ilsco “Type PCT,” Blackburn “AMT.”

C. For copper wire, sizes 1/0 AWG and larger, use UL 486A-486B listed

circumferential or hexagonal crimp compression terminals, splices, or adapters.

1. Provide compression terminals and splices made from electro-tin plated

seamless copper tubing and marked with wire size, die index/color code,

and number/locations of crimps. Manufacturers: FCI Burndy Types

“YA,” “YA-L,” “YA-L-NT,” “YS,” and “YC-C.” Thomas & Betts

“Color-Keyed.”

24

Yellow Jacket, Bumblebee, Cable Guard are registered trademarks of Peterson Systems International, Inc. 25

Sta-Kon is a registered trademark of Thomas and Betts Corporation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 141 of 315


26 05 19 – 6

2. Provide straight and offset compression adapters made from electro-tin

plated aluminum, NRTL listed for use on copper conductors, and marked

with wire size, die index / color code, and number / locations of crimps.

Each adapter shall include a 600V, 90°C rated insulating cover.

Manufacturer: FCI Burndy Types “AYP” and “AYPO.”

3. Range-taking, die-less, or indenter-applied terminals are not acceptable for

control wiring. Use nylon insulated crimp-on terminals with insulation

grip that meet the requirements of UL 486A-486B. Manufacturer:

3M “Scotchlok MNG,” Thomas & Betts “Sta-Kon.”

4. Use ring tongue terminals for nutted studs.

5. Use flanged fork terminals for barrier terminal blocks.

D. Insulation-piercing type connectors are not acceptable for power or control

wiring.

2.6 INSULATING TAPE AND TUBING

A. For making re-enterable tape-insulated splices and connections, provide varnished

cambric electrical insulating tape made of cotton cambric fabric that is oil primed

and coated with electrical insulating varnish. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 2510”

(no adhesive) and “Scotch 2520” (pressure-sensitive adhesive).

B. Insulate taped splices and connections using ethylene propylene rubber (EPR)

tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 and is rated for 90°C continuous

operation and 130°C short-term overload service. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch

130C.”

C. For the outer covering of tape-insulated splices and connections use vinyl plastic

tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 and has the following characteristics:

1. 8.5 mil minimum thickness.

2. ASTM D3005, Rated 600V and 105°C, suitable for indoor and outdoor

applications.

3. Retains flexibility, adhesion, and applicable at temperature ranges from

0 through 100°F without loss of physical or electrical properties.

4. Resistant to abrasion, moisture, alkalis, acid, corrosion, and sunlight.

5. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch Super 88.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 142 of 315


26 05 19 – 7

D. Provide heat shrinkable tubing that meets the requirements of UL 486D and has

the following characteristics:

1. Rated 600V.

2. Factory applied adhesive/sealant.

3. Split resistant.

4. Manufacturer: 3M “ITCSN.”

E. Use motor lead splicing kits to insulate and seal connections to leads for motors

rated 480V and less. Manufacturer: 3M “5300 Series.”

2.7 WIRE PULLING LUBRICANT

A. Provide NRTL-listed wire pulling lubricant that is compatible with the conductor

insulation or jacket, has a maximum coefficient of dynamic friction of 0.25, and

leaves no flammable residue. For cold weather installations, provide wire pulling

lubricant suitable for conduit temperature.

B. Compatibility with conductor insulation shall be determined in accordance with

IEEE 1210.

C. Manufacturer:

1. For conduit temperature above freezing: American Polywater

Corporation, “Polywater®26

” “Lubricant J.”

2. For conduit temperature below freezing: American Polywater

Corporation, “Polywater” “Lubricant WJ.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that work of other trades likely to damage wire and cable is completed.

C. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.

D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

26

Polywater is a registered trademark of American Polywater Corporation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 143 of 315


26 05 19 – 8

E. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.

1. Route wire and cable as required meeting project conditions.

2. Where cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated,

determine exact routing and lengths required to meet field conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine raceways and building finishes that are to receive wires and cables for

compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with

installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Swab raceway before installing wire.

C. Do not handle or pull cables that are colder than +15°F. Store cold cables for at

least 24 hours in a heated building prior to installation.

3.3 WIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install wire according to, the NEC, the requirements in this Section.

B. Do not bend cables installed in raceways to less than manufacturer’s

recommended bending radii. Lay cables in raceways in straight, parallel lines,

and avoid crossing.

1. Use lubricant recommended by wire or cable manufacturer, or wire-

pulling compound specified when pulling wire and cable through conduit.

2. Do not install or handle wires with thermoplastic insulation or jacket when

ambient temperature is 15°F or lower.

3. Identify conductors, by wire numbers shown on the Drawings, with

wiremarkers. Attach wiremarkers at termination points within 2-in. of

wire terminations. Marker nomenclature shall be visible without moving

wires or markers.

C. Do not damage conductor, insulation, or jacket by excessive installation pulling

tension or sidewall bearing pressure.

1. No tension monitoring devices are required where hand pull techniques

are used.

2. Calculate expected cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressures

for each set of conductors being pulled into a conduit run where any of the

following combinations of bends and raceway length is exceeded between

accessible pull points:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 144 of 315


26 05 19 – 9

a. 4 equivalent 90-degree bends and 10 ft of raceway.

b. 3 equivalent 90-degree bends and 40 ft of raceway.

c. 2 equivalent 90-degree bends and 80 ft of raceway.

d. 1 equivalent 90-degree bend and 150 ft of raceway.

e. Straight pull with more than 250 ft of raceway.

3. For cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressure calculations use

formulas and factors described in IEEE 422.

4. Obtain recommended maximum conductor or cable pulling tension and

sidewall bearing pressure values from the manufacturer, or use the

following maximum allowable values:

a. Maximum sidewall bearing pressure: 500 lb/ft.

b. Maximum tension, pulling directly on conductor: 0.008 lb/cmil

c. Maximum tension, pulling on basket grip over insulation jacket:

2000 lb, not to exceed 0.008 lb/cmil of conductor.

5. Use a tension measuring device to monitor pulling force on each pull of

conductors where a pulling winch is used.

a. Record the maximum measured pulling tension for each monitored

cable pull.

b. Place the recorded cable pulling tension for each monitored cable

pull and the corresponding calculated allowable pulling tension in

the work package or fabrication document.

6. Deleted.

7. Deleted.

D. Use solid or stranded copper conductors not smaller than 12 AWG for outlets and

lighting branch circuits. Do not “through-pull” conductors at boxes, fittings, or

cabinets where a change of raceway alignment occurs.

3.4 TYPE TC CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install TC cables according to the NEC and requirements in this Section.

B. Install and support Type TC cables as required in Article 336 of the NEC.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 145 of 315


26 05 19 – 10

3.5 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install conductors in terminals, splices, adapters, and connectors in accordance

with the manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation

instructions available at the construction site.

B. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no

perceptible temperature rise above the conductor temperature.

C. Do not nick conductors when removing insulation.

D. Do not cut conductor strands to fit into connectors, splices, adapters, or terminals.

E. Make connections using clean connection surfaces. Wire brush conductors

immediately before installing lugs, terminals, splices, or adapters.

F. Connect conductors 1/0 AWG and larger using compression terminals at the

locations described below. Compression terminals shall be installed where there

is adequate wire bending space to accommodate compression terminals. Select

compression terminals suitable for the conductor sizes, materials, and termination

point configurations. Install compression terminals using the manufacturer’s

recommended dies and minimum 12-ton force compression tools.

1. Circuit breakers with frame size greater than 100 amperes that are NRTL

listed for with compression terminals.

2. Safety switches and fused switches rated more than 100 amperes.

3. Transformers; refer to Section 26 22 13, “Low Voltage Distribution

Transformers.”

4. Switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, and similar service and

distribution equipment.

5. Utilization equipment connections that are NRTL listed for with

compression terminals.

G. For conductors sized 1/0 AWG and larger, and where compression lugs cannot be

installed, connect using mechanical lugs, in the locations or conditions described

below.

1. Connection points not NRTL-listed for either compression terminals or

compression adapters.

2. Where there is insufficient wire bending space to accommodate either

compression terminals or compression adapters.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 146 of 315


26 05 19 – 11

H. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and

instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws

and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer’s published torque-tightening

values for equipment connectors.

3.6 INSULATING TAPE AND TUBING INSTALLATION

A. Install insulating tape and tubing in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the

construction site.

B. Insulate splices and taps of irregular shapes with manufactured insulating covers

or insulating tape built up to not less than 150% of insulation rating of conductor.

1. Apply varnished cambric tape over connections where re-entry is likely,

such as motor lead connections.

2. Use rubber insulating tape in half-lapped layers to develop the basic

insulation over splices and taps.

3. Use vinyl plastic tape in half-lapped layers to provide the outer protective

covering over splices and taps.

C. Insulate cylinder shaped splices and taps, connector barrels and adapter barrels

using heat shrinkable insulating tubing, insulating covers manufactured for the

connector, or tape insulation as described above.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53, “Identification for

Electrical Systems.”

B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on

Drawings.

C. Apply color coding tape on conductors at each termination, splice, junction, and

pull box.


A. Observe conductors and cables during the installation process.

1. Reject and replace entire reels, rolls, or boxes containing conductors or

cables with material or manufacturing defects.

2. Reject and replace cable or conductor segments that have been kinked,

dented, or otherwise damaged during handling or installation.

B. Deleted.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 147 of 315


26 05 19 – 12

C. Perform the following inspections:

1. Inspect conductors and cables for:

a. Freedom from material defect or physical damage.

b. Correct conductor size, material, and insulation type.

c. Correct color coding and identification.

2. Inspect connections for:

a. Correct connector size and type according to the Specifications.

b. Deleted.

D. Perform the following tests:

1. Before connecting conductors to equipment, use a megohmmeter in a

1-minute test to verify the insulation integrity of each service conductor

and feeder conductor with respect to ground and other conductors in the

same raceway.

a. Use 1000VDC to test conductors rated 600V and 2000V, and

500VDC for conductors rated 300V or less.

b. Insulation test values shall be in accordance with the following:

i. Conductors with 300V insulation rating and insulation

resistances over 25 megohms are acceptable.

ii. Conductors with 600V insulation rating and insulation


iii. Conductors with 2000V insulation rating and insulation


c. Conductors with insulation resistances less than indicated above

shall be investigated.

2. Prior to connecting conductors to equipment, test continuity to ensure

proper circuit is identified to facilitate correct connection of each power

circuit conductor and each control circuit conductor.

3. Test the equipment and wiring for continuity and unintentional grounds,

and verify proper phase sequence and voltage at equipment served before

attempt is made to operate equipment.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 148 of 315


26 05 19 – 13

4. Perform insulation (megger) test on electric heat trace cable at installation

before and after insulation is installed per manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Measure and record in the work package or fabrication document the

tightness of not less than 10% of each size and type of mechanical or

bolted connection using a calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver.

Additionally, verify proper crimping method, as applicable.

a. Compare measured torque with torque recommended by the

connector manufacturer or as shown in Attachment 1,

“Recommended Tightening Torque per UL 486A-486B.”

b. If any connection is found to be less than 90% of the recommended

torque, notify the Buyer’s Technical Representative and re-torque

all bolted connections on the Project.

E. Remove and replace defective, incorrect, or improperly installed conductors and

connectors. Re-inspect and re-test replacement conductors and connectors.

F. Place test and inspection records in the work package or fabrication document.

G. Verify inspections and tests required by other sections are completed before

conductors may be energized.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 149 of 315


26 05 19 – Att. 1–1


RECOMMENDED TIGHTENING TORQUE PER UL 486A-486B

Table 21 – Tightening torque for screws

Conductor Size installed in

Connector

Tightening Torque, N•m (lbf-in)

Slotted Head No. 10 and Larger* Hexagonal Head – External Drive

Socket Wrench Slot Width – 1.2mm

(.047 in) or Less and

Slot Length – 6.4mm

(1/4 in.) or less

Slot Width – Over 1.2mm

(.047 in) or Slot Length –

Over 6.4mm (1/4 in.) or

less

AWG or

kcmil mm2

Split-Bolt

Connectors

Other

Connectors

30 – 10 .05 – 5.3 2.3 (20) 4.0 (35) 9.0 (80) 8.5 (75)

8 8.4 2.8 (25) 4.5 (40) 9.0 (80) 8.5 (75)

6 – 4 13.2 – 21.2 4.0 (35) 5.1 (45) 18.6 (165) 12.4 (110)

3 26.7 4.0 (35) 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150)

2 33.6 4.5 (40) 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150)

1 42.4 - 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150)

1/0 – 2/0 53.5 – 67.4 - 5.6 (50) 43.5 (385) 20.3 (180)

3/0 – 4/0 85.0 – 107.2 - 5.6 (50) 56.5 (500) 28.2 (250)

250 – 350 127 – 177 - 5.6 (50) 73.4 (650) 36.7 (325)

400 203 - 5.6 (50) 93.2 (825) 36.7 (325)

500 253 - 5.6 (50) 93.2 (825) 42.4 (375)

600 – 750 304 – 380 - 5.6 (50) 113.0 (1000) 42.4 (375)

800 – 1000 406 – 508 - 5.6 (50) 124.3 (1100) 56.5 (500)

1250 – 2000 635 – 1000 - - 124.3 (1100) 67.8 (600)

* For values of slot width or length not corresponding to those specified, select the largest torque value associated with the

conductor size. Slot width is the nominal design value. Slot length shall be measured at the bottom of the slot.

Table 22 – Tightening torque for slotted head screws smaller than No. 10 intended for use with

8 AWG (8.4 mm2 ) or smaller conductors

Slot Length of Screw* Tightening Torque, N•m (lbf-in)

Slot Width of Screw

Smaller than 1.2mm

(.047 in.)

Slot Width of Screw 1.2mm

(.047 in.) and larger** mm inch

Less than 4 Less than

5/32 0.79 (7) 1.0 (9)

4 5/32 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12)

4.8 3/16 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12)

5.6 7/32 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12)

6.4 1/4 1.0 (9) 1.4 (12)

7.1 9/32 - 1.7 (15)

Above 7.1 Above 9/32 - 2.3 (20)

* For slot lengths of intermediate values, select torques pertaining to next shorter slot length.

Also see Table 21 for screws with multiple tightening means.

Slot length shall be measured at the bottom of the slot.

** Slot width is the nominal design value

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 150 of 315


26 05 19 – Att. 1–2

Table 23 – Tightening torque for screws with recessed allen or square drives

Socket Width Across Flats* Tightening Torque, N•m

(lbf-in) mm inch

3.2 1/8 5.1 (45)

4.0 5/32 11.3 (100)

4.8 3/16 13.6 (120)

5.6 7/32 16.9 (150)

6.4 1/4 25.4 (225)

7.9 5/16 33.9 (300)

9.5 3/8 45.2 (400)

12.7 1/2 56.6 (500)

14.3 9/16 67.8 (600)

* See Table 21 for screws with multiple tightening means

END OF ATTACHMENT 1

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 151 of 315


26 05 26 – 1

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Connection to Main Grounding Electrode System.

B. Circuit and System Grounding.

C. Enclosure and Equipment Grounding System.







A. American Standards for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM B8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay Stranded

Copper Conductors

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground

Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a

Grounding System

IEEE 142 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial

and Commercial Power Systems

IEEE 837 IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent

Connections used in Substation Grounding



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 152 of 315


26 05 26 – 2


UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with

Copper Conductors


1.3 SUBMITTALS






B. Verify products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory (NRTL) for the application and environment in which installed.

1.5 RECEIVING, STORING, AND PROTECTING

A. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to manufacturer’s

instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted; in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR

A. Provide bare stranded, soft temper copper cable that conforms to ASTM B8.

B. Provide ground electrode conductor for separately derived systems and equipment

in the Tank Farm and bond to nearest tank riser.

2.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Provide NRTL-listed THHN/THWN insulated copper wire.

B. Use solid or stranded grounding conductors 12 AWG and smaller where not

subject to vibration or repeated flexing.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 153 of 315


26 05 26 – 3

C. Use stranded grounding conductors for 10 AWG and larger.

D. Use stranded grounding conductors where subject to vibration or repeated flexing.

E. Color code grounding conductors as follows:

1. Equipment ground:

a. Conductors 6 AWG and smaller: Green colored insulation.

b. Conductors 4 AWG and larger: Green colored insulation or black

colored insulation with 3/4 in. wide band of water and oil-resistant

green plastic adhesive tape.

2.4 GROUND PLATES

A. Provide ground plates designed for flush mounting in concrete structures.

B. Furnish copper alloy castings with four 1/2 in. x 13 in. threaded holes at

1.75 in. x 1.75 in. NEMA spacing and a welding stud or compression connection

suitable for 2 AWG to 250 kcmil copper conductor.

C. Manufacturer: Burndy “YGF.”

2.5 CONDUIT GROUNDING BUSHINGS

A. Provide NRTL-listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150°C rated insulated throat

grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cable lugs.

B. Manufacturers: O-Z/Gedney Type “BLG.”

2.6 EXOTHERMIC WELD GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A. Provide molds and welding material for making exothermic weld connections.

B. In interior locations and in vaults, use low smoke emission type welding material.

C. Match mold and weld material-to-material types, shapes, and sizes to be joined.

D. Manufacturer: ERICO Cadweld.

2.7 COMPRESSION GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A. Provide wrought copper connectors, terminals, taps, and splices for making

irreversible compression grounding connections.

B. Furnish NRTL-listed grounding connectors that are suitable for direct burial and

have been tested successfully according to the requirements of IEEE 837.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 154 of 315


26 05 26 – 4

C. Provide connector manufacturer’s hydraulic compression tools and dies that

match the connectors.

D. Match connector and die size to material shapes and conductor sizes to be joined.

E. Use two-hole heavy-duty compression lugs for bolted connections to ground bars,

ground plates, and equipment ground pads.

F. Manufacturer: Burndy “Hyground®27

.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that work of other trades likely to damage grounding and bonding material

has been completed.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

C. Grounding cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.

1. Install and route cable as required meeting project conditions.

2. Where cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated,

determine exact locations, routing, and lengths required to meet project

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine equipment and building finishes that are to receive grounding and

bonding material for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions.

Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.3 GENERAL

A. Comply with the requirements of the NEC, this Section, and the Drawings.

B. Install grounding and bonding material according to manufacturer’s instructions.

Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

C. Use the following connection methods unless otherwise specified or indicated on

the Drawings. Use compression or bolted grounding connection methods in the

Tank Farm areas:

1. Use exothermic weld grounding connections for underground or concealed

connections of dissimilar materials.

27

Hyground is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Shelton, Connecticut.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 155 of 315


26 05 26 – 5

2. Use exothermic weld or compression grounding connections for

underground or concealed connections of like materials.

3. Use exothermic weld, compression, or bolted grounding connections for

accessible connections.

4. Make bolted connections using bolts, nuts, flat washers, and toothed lock

washers suitable for the connector and the installation environment;

acceptable materials include high strength silicon bronze and 18-8 alloy

stainless steel.

5. Make irreversible bolted connections using 18-8 alloy stainless steel

tamper-resistant bolts and tamper-resistant nuts along with flat washers,

and toothed lock washers. Tamper-resistant nuts and bolts must resist

loosening with common tools; acceptable tamper-resistant fasteners

include penta-head, break-away, and oval designs.

D. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and

bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for

connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not

indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified

in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables,”

Attachment 1, “Recommended Tightening Torque per UL 486A-486B.” Use a

calibrated torque wrench.

E. Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure

for compression connectors. Follow connector manufacturer’s installation

instructions and use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the

connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a

visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed.

F. Install exothermic welds in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces

indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

G. Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action

or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and

connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity

and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.

3. Make aluminum to steel connections with stainless steel separators and

mechanical clamps.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 156 of 315


26 05 26 – 6

4. Make aluminum to galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper

jumpers and mechanical clamps.

5. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material

to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

3.4 MAIN GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM

A. Install in accordance with the NEC and the Drawings.

B. Concrete encased ground electrode and ground plates are provide in accordance

with Specifications below and Drawings.

1. Install a concrete-encased main grounding electrode in the lower part of

the perimeter strip footing or grade beam to form a complete and

continuous loop around the structure. Encase the electrode with at least

2 in. of concrete from the bottom of the foundation or footing. Use one of

the following materials for the electrode:

a. Bare or zinc galvanized or other electrically conductive coated

steel reinforcing bars, minimum 1/2-in. diameter. Bond

reinforcing rods together using steel wire ties or other effective

means.

b. Bare #2 copper conductor. Space cable from the bottom and sides

of the grade beam so it has at least 2 in. of concrete coverage.

Bond to the rebar in one place.

c. Perform NEC inspection of main grounding electrode prior to

pouring concrete.

C. Install ground plates flush with the concrete slab. Locate ground plates adjacent

to switchboard. Bond ground electrode to ground plates with #2 AWG pigtail

using UL-listed compression fittings.

D. Bond building perimeter structural steel column to the main grounding electrode

via ground plates and ground cables sized as indicated on the Drawings.

3.5 CIRCUIT AND SYSTEM GROUNDING

A. Connect the service entrance equipment ground bus to the ground plate; use

ground cable as indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller than the grounding

electrode conductor required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG.

B. In the service entrance equipment, connect the neutral bus to the ground bus using

a bonding jumper not smaller than the grounding electrode conductor required by

the NEC; do not use a bonding screw for this purpose. Make no other neutral-to-

ground connections on the load side of the service entrance disconnect.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 157 of 315


26 05 26 – 7

C. Separately Derived Systems:

1. Connect ground bus of first disconnecting means for separately derived

systems (e.g., dry type transformers) to the nearest ground plate

(preferred) or building structural steel column; use grounding conductor

sized as shown on the Drawings or as required by the NEC.

2. At the first system overcurrent device or disconnecting means, connect the

neutral bus to the ground bus using a bonding jumper sized as required by

the NEC. For systems in the Tank Farm, provide grounding electrode

conductor to nearest tank riser. Sized grounding electrode conductor in

accordance with the NEC and use UL Listed pipe grounding clamp or to

an existing ground tap on riser with the approval of the TOC Construction

Representative.

3.6 ENCLOSURE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Provide permanent and effective equipment, enclosure, and raceway grounding in

accordance with NEC requirements, and as further specified or shown on the

Drawings.

B. Provide an equipment ground bar, separate from any neutral bar, in all switchgear,

switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters,

disconnect switches, cabinets, etc., for grounding the enclosure and for connecting

other equipment and raceway ground conductors. Make connections to the

ground bar using mechanical lugs or compression lugs.

C. Make connections and couplings on metallic conduit systems wrench tight.

D. Grounding Bushings:

1. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduit containing circuits rated

480 VAC or 100 amperes and higher.

2. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduits entering enclosures

through concentric, eccentric, or oversize knockouts.

3. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic

enclosure without effective electrical connection such as locknuts or

threaded bushings.

4. Bond conduit grounding bushing lug to the equipment ground bar or

ground lug in switchboard, panelboards, transformers, starters, disconnect

switches, cabinets, etc. Size bonding jumpers in accordance with the

NEC.

E. Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor for each feeder and branch

circuit.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 158 of 315


26 05 26 – 8

1. Install the grounding conductor within the common conduit or raceway

with the related phase and neutral conductors and connect to the

grounding terminal or grounding bus in each box or cabinet.

2. Size equipment ground conductor in accordance with the NEC or as

shown on the Drawings.

F. In each 15 or 20 ampere branch circuit outlet box and junction box, install a green

colored washer head grounding screw with a 12 AWG equipment grounding

conductor pigtail.

G. Connect receptacle grounding terminals to the equipment ground system using

minimum 12 AWG equipment grounding conductor. Do not use a “self-

grounding” receptacle strap as the only equipment grounding path.


A. General: Perform on-site verification, certification, and acceptance testing of the

grounding installation during construction if required by the design media.

B. Notify the TOC Construction Representative ten working days in advance of the

expected completion of a grounding system installation specified in Part C.

Verification and testing can be scheduled in parts or by area depending on the

system and construction schedule.

C. Before work is concealed, verify and certify that the following grounding

installations have been made correctly:

1. The building grounding electrode system. This includes the bonding of

the structural steel columns and bonding of other metallic systems.

2. Ground plates and grounding bars.

3. All other underground grounding installations.

D. Acceptance Testing: Perform acceptance testing for building/transformer area

grounding electrode system and place test results in work package or fabrication

document. Tests may be witnessed by designated representatives.

1. Perform ground-impedance measurements using the “fall-of-potential”

method in accordance with IEEE 81. Use instrumentation specifically

designed for ground impedance testing. Provide sufficient spacing of test

electrodes so that the plotted curves flatten in the 62% area of the distance

between the item under test and the current electrode. When sufficient

spacing of electrodes is impractical for the “fall-of-potential” method,

perform ground-impedance measurements using either the “intersecting

curves method” or the “slope method,” referenced in IEEE 81. Investigate

and correct ground resistances that exceed the following values:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 159 of 315


26 05 26 – 9

a. Service rated more than 50 kVA but less than 2500 kVA: 5 ohms.

2. Test equipment ground resistances for the following items. Measure

resistance between the equipment item and the Electrode Ground Plate.

Use the “two-point method” of IEEE 81. Investigate and correct

equipment ground resistances that exceed 0.5 ohm.

a. Switchboards

E. Prepare test reports of the ground resistance at each test location. Include

observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results.

Describe any measures taken to improve test results. Place reports in work

package or fabrication document.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 160 of 315


26 05 29 – 1

SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and install, hangers, supports, anchors, concrete bases, and other positive

fastenings for non-structural electrical components such that gravity loads are

safely transferred to the structure.









Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength

B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

Title 29 Labor

Part 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

C. Federal Specification (FS)

FS WW-H-171E Hangers and Supports, Pipe

D. International Code Council (ICC)


E. Manufacturers’ Standardization Society (MSS)



Installation

MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and

Application

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 161 of 315


26 05 29 – 2

F. Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (MFMA)

MFMA-4 Metal Framing Standards Publication

MFMA-102 Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing

MFMA-103 Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)


1.3 SUBMITTALS





A. Furnish and install hangers and supports that conform to the drawings and

requirements of the following codes and standards:

1. NEC.

B. Where a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) has requirements for

such products, provide products that are NRTL listed and labeled for the

application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

1.5 RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING


instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS


Contract Statement of Work

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 162 of 315


26 05 29 – 3

2.2 COATINGS AND MATERIALS

A. Furnish products for use indoors protected with zinc coating or with treatment of

equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or

inherent material characteristic.

B. Furnish products for use outdoors or in damp or corrosive indoor locations with

hot-dip galvanized coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance

using approved alternative treatment, finish, or material such as stainless steel

with inherent corrosion resistant characteristics.

2.3 RACEWAY SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Furnish supports as described below for the installation of raceway systems.

B. Use pressed steel, single bolt hangers to support individual RGS, IMC, or EMT

conduits from threaded rods or beam clamps. Manufacturer: Steel City “6H

Series.”

C. Use malleable iron conduit clamps to secure individual RGS, IMC, or EMT

conduit runs across, parallel, or perpendicular to beams, channels, and angle

supports. Manufacturer: Steel City “RC, EC, and PC Series.”

D. Support multiple parallel horizontal conduits with trapeze hangers fabricated from

framing channel materials specified below.

2.4 HANGER RODS

A. Furnish mild steel rods that conform to ASTM A307.

B. Furnish rods that are threaded on both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous

threaded with UNC (coarse) thread pitch.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. Post-Installed Concrete Anchors:

1. Furnish post-installed concrete anchors as shown on the Drawings.

2. Each post-installed anchor shall have an ICC-ES evaluation report stating

that the product is compliant with the current edition of the IBC and the

intended conditions of use.

3. For applications in outdoor, damp, or corrosive locations, furnish stainless

steel post-installed anchors.

4. Furnish post-installed expansion, adhesive, and undercut anchors specified

in the Contract Statement of Work

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 163 of 315


26 05 29 – 4

5. Powder-actuated threaded studs: Use zinc-plated carbon steel or stainless

steel suitable for the intended service:

a. 1/4-20 threaded stud: Manufacturer: Hilti X-W6.

b. 3/8-16 threaded stud: Manufacturer: Hilti W10.

6. Concrete and masonry screw anchors: Heat-treated carbon steel.

Manufacturer: Simpson Strong-Tie “Titen HD.”

B. Beam Clamps: NRTL-listed, or compliant with Federal Specification

WW-H-171E, or compliant with MSS SP-69 and SP-58.

2.6 FRAMING CHANNEL SYSTEMS

A. Furnish U-channel framing systems that conform to MFMA-4 and are fabricated

using minimum 12-gage steel.

B. Furnish fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of

the same manufacturer.

C. Manufacturers: B-Line.

2.7 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Furnish shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled

from U-channel components.

B. Furnish steel brackets fabricated from angles, channels, and other standard

structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install hangers and supports according to the NEC, the requirements in this

Section, and specific supporting requirements in other Sections and drawings.

B. Conform to manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for selection and

installation of hangers and supports.

C. Do not use wire or perforated strap for permanent supports.

D. Install flexible sections in electrical conduits and raceways where they cross

expansion joints. Do not support conduits, boxes, raceways, etc., from ceiling

suspension wires.

E. Use appropriate, calibrated, special tools when installing devices for which

special installation tools are recommended by the manufacturer.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 164 of 315


26 05 29 – 5

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive hangers and supports for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the system. Do not

proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 FASTENERS

A. Post-installed concrete expansion anchors: Install in accordance with Section

03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts,” and the product’s ICC-ES

report conditions of use.

B. Use beam clamps or machine bolts, nuts, and washers for fastening to metal.

1. When clamping is impractical, obtain approval from the TOC

Construction Representative before drilling, punching, cutting, or welding

to building structural steel members for support attachments.

C. Fasten equipment to concrete or masonry with expansion anchors.

D. The use of lead-cinch drop in anchors is not allowed.

E. Torque threaded fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 RACEWAY SUPPORTS

A. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as

necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other

hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and

conduits.

B. Support three or more parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze

hangers.

C. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers.

3.5 BOXES AND CABINETS

A. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure, or by approved

brackets or bar hangers, as shown on the Drawings or as required. Where bar

hangers are used, attach the bar to structure on opposite sides of the box.

B. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported

separately except where used for fixture support.

C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards as shown on the Drawings or as

required.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 165 of 315


26 05 29 – 6

3.6 FRAMING CHANNEL SYSTEMS

A. Select and install framing channel systems in accordance with MFMA-103.

B. Use framing channel to support electrical equipment that is mounted free of walls.

C. Use framing channel to support equipment mounted on walls that do not have

sufficient strength to resist pull-out or wallowing out of equipment mounting

bolts.

3.7 HANGER RODS

A. Use minimum 3/8-in. diameter threaded rod; use larger diameter rod as indicated

on the Drawings, in other Sections, or in the supported equipment manufacturer’s

installation instructions.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 166 of 315


26 05 33 – 1

SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Conduits and fittings.

B. Outlet boxes and handholes.

C. Pull and junction boxes.

D. Wireway.







A. Hanford Documents

TFC-ENG-STD-15 Raceway Systems Standard

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA C80.1 Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

NEMA C80.3 Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

NEMA FB1 Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for

Conduit and Cable Assemblies

NEMA ICS 4 Industrial Control and Systems Terminal Blocks

NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

NEMA RN 1 PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel

Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA OS 1 Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers,

and Box Supports

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 167 of 315


26 05 33 – 2

NEMA OS 3 Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical

Outlet Boxes

NEMA TC 2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and

Conduit

NEMA TC 3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and

Tubing

NEMA TC 6 and 8 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for

Underground Installations

NEMA TC 7 Smooth wall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene

Conduit

NEMA TC 9 Fitting for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic

Utilities Duct for Underground Installation



D. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE)

SCTE 77 Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity


Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment

Directory

Electrical Construction Materials Directory

UL 1 Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit

UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit

UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-

Environmental Considerations

UL 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit, Electrical

UL 467 Grounding and bonding Equipment

UL 498 Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 508A, 2014 Industrial Control Panels

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 168 of 315


26 05 33 – 3

UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber

Insulating Tape

UL 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes

UL 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes

UL 514C Non-Metallic Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes

UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit

UL 651A Schedule 40 and 80 High Density Polyethene

(HDPE) Conduit

UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Not Used.



B. Rigid steel conduit. Verify the following:

1. Each length is marked with manufacturer’s name, UL label, and “Rigid

Metal Conduit” or “Rigid Steel Conduit.”

C. Conduit fittings/metallic outlet boxes/terminal boxes (rigid, stainless steel).

Verify the following:

1. Check one lot or container and verify each item has, at a minimum, the UL

symbol and that the shipping label or the container for which the items are

shipped contains the manufacturers name, the UL listing, and the type of

items shipped. If the item is not marked with the UL symbol or

manufacturer’s name, visually inspect the shipping carton of the item to

ensure it is in accordance with the UL and manufacturer’s published data.

2. Check one lot or container and verify item size is in accordance with

product description.

3. Verify external coating for each item is uniform (rigid steel only) and no

damage exists.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 169 of 315


26 05 33 – 4

4. Verify material used is ferrous metal (rigid or malleable iron only) by

performing magnetic test.

D. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the

environment in which installed.

E. Cabinets containing assembled control systems shall be designed, constructed,

and listed or labeled to the UL 508A Standard, as applicable.



instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 COATINGS

A. Provide products with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion

resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material

characteristic that is suitable for the environment in which the product will be

installed and used.

2.3 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish RMC that meets the requirements of UL 6 and NEMA C80.1.

B. Furnish zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies that meet

the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1.

2.4 PLASTIC-COATED STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish polyvinyl chloride (PVC) exterior coated, urethane interior coated, RMC

that meets the requirements of NEMA RN 1.

B. Use factory-fabricated elbows.

C. Furnish 40 mils PVC exterior coated, urethane interior coated, zinc-plated,

threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies meeting the requirements of

UL 514B.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 170 of 315


26 05 33 – 5

2.5 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (RNC) AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish RNC that conforms to UL 651, UL 651A, NEMA TC 2, NEMA TC 3,

NEMA TC 6 & 8, and NEMA TC 7.

B. Furnish non-metallic, solvent-welded socket fittings that meet the requirements of

UL 651, NEMA TC 3, and NEMA TC 9.

2.6 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish galvanized EMT that conforms to UL 797 and NEMA C80.3.

B. Furnish compression type fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B and

NEMA FB1. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

2.7 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish galvanized steel flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of

UL 1.

B. Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B

and NEMA FB1. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

2.8 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish liquid-tight flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL 360.

B. Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron or zinc-plated steel liquid-tight fittings that

meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1. Furnish insulated throat

connectors.

C. Furnish galvanized steel flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of

UL 1 and the NEC.

2.9 INSULATING BUSHINGS

A. Provide NRTL listed insulating bushings with 105°C rated insulation.

B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type IB.

2.10 GROUNDING BUSHINGS

A. Provide NRTL listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150°C rated insulated throat

grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cable lugs.

B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type BLG.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 171 of 315


26 05 33 – 6

2.11 EXPANSION FITTINGS

A. Furnish NRTL listed expansion fittings with hot dipped galvanized malleable iron

body, factory-installed packing and a bonding jumper.

B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type AX, TX, or EXE with Type BJ bonding

jumper.

C. Lubricant and Sealant

1. Lubricant and Sealant for Conduit Thread: Conductive compound

providing anti-seize and corrosion protection. Thomas and Betts

Corporation “KOPR-SHIELD®28

,” or approved substitute.

2.12 PROTECTION TAPE AND CONDUIT SEALANT

A. Furnish pressure-sensitive, 10 mil thick. PVC based tape for corrosion protection

of metal conduit and fittings. Manufacturer: 3M, Type 50.

B. Furnish plastic insulating tape that complies with UL 510.

C. Furnish electrical color-coding tape that complies with UL 510.

D. Furnish sealing compound for conduit: “Sealex®29

” by Porcelain Products

Company or “Duct Seal®30

” by Gardner-Bender.

2.13 RACEWAY MEASURING TAPE

A. Furnish raceway measuring tape with permanently printed measurements in 1-ft

increments and minimum 1200 lb average breaking strength.

2.14 WIREWAY

A. Provide NRTL listed, wireway with covers, elbows, tees, hangers, and fittings

required for a complete system. Wireway shall be rated for environment to be

installed.

2.15 OUTLET BOXES

A. Provide outlet boxes selected for specific installations using the guidance in

NEMA OS 3 and the requirements of this Section.

B. Exterior Mounted Enclosures (terminal boxes) shall be: NEMA ICS 6, NEMA

Type 4 unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.

28

KOPR-SHIELD is a registered trademark of Jet-Lube, Inc., Houston, Texas. 29

Sealex is a registered trademark of Porcelain Products Company. 30

Duct Seal is a registered trademark of Gardner-Bender, Inc.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 172 of 315


26 05 33 – 7

C. For dry locations provide galvanized steel outlet boxes that comply with

UL 514A.

1. For luminaire outlets use 4 in. x 1 1/2-in. deep (min.) boxes with fixture

stud attachment as required to support luminaires.

2. For surface outlet boxes in EMT raceway systems, use 4 in. x 2 1/8-in.

deep square boxes. Provide deeper boxes or multiple gang boxes as

required to fit devices. Provide square surface covers that match the

installed device and have not less than two holes for securing the device to

the cover.

D. For damp or wet locations and for surface-mounted RMC or IMC raceway

systems, provide outlet boxes that comply with UL 498, UL 514A, UL 514B, and

NEMA FB1.

1. For lighting fixture outlets use 4 in. x 2 1/16-in. deep (min.) round cast

malleable iron boxes with threaded hubs.

2. For surface wall-mounted outlets, use 4 11/16 square, 2 11/16-in. deep

cast malleable iron boxes with threaded hubs. Provide multiple gang

boxes as required to fit devices. Provide gasketed cast malleable iron or

cast copper-free aluminum covers that match the installed device and have

not less than two holes for securing the device to the cover.

E. For all entries into NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosures: Type CGB for exposed

cable, and Myers type watertight fittings or sealing-type locknuts for conduits.

2.16 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Metallic boxes (junction boxes) shall be NEMA ICS 6, Type 3R, 16 or 14 gage

steel.

B. For dry locations in clean, non-contamination environments, use galvanized sheet

steel pull and junction boxes that comply with UL 50 Type 1 and the NEC as to

size and construction. Use boxes not less than 4-in. square x 1 1/2-in. deep with

screw-secured covers. Provide larger boxes as required by the number and size of

conduits and conductors.

C. For dry locations in dusty environments, use galvanized steel pull and junction

boxes that comply with UL 50 Type 12 and the NEC as to size and construction.

Use boxes not less than 6-in. square x 4-in. deep with gasketed covers. Provide

larger boxes as required by the number and size of conduits and conductors.

D. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs up to 3/4 in. trade size,

provide 4 11/16-in. square, 2 11/16-in. deep (min.) cast malleable iron pull and

junction boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed cast malleable iron or cast

copper-free aluminum covers.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 173 of 315


26 05 33 – 8

E. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs 1 in. trade size and

larger, provide galvanized sheet-steel pull and junction boxes and covers that

comply with UL 50 Type 3R.

F. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations that are subject to hose-directed water,

provide pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 4.

G. For in-ground, non-metallic, open-bottom handholes, provide products that are

NRTL-listed to SCTE 77.

1. Material: Polymer concrete.

2. Minimum SCTE 77 load rating:

a. Located in sidewalks: Tier 8.

b. Located in driveways, parking lots, and off-roadway locations:

Tier 22.

3. Size: As shown on drawings.

4. Cover: Non-skid cover with stainless steel cover bolts.

5. Identification: Permanent mark or logo on cover prominently identifying

the function of the enclosure in accordance with NEC requirements.

6. Manufacturer: Quazite®31

“Style PC, PG, or PT.” or as shown on

drawings.

H. Provide connection points for equipment grounding conductors in each box.

I. For all entries into NEMA ICS 6, Type 3R enclosures: Type CGB for exposed

cable, and Myers type watertight fittings or sealing-type locknuts for conduits.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways and boxes for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do

not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Scale dimensions on the Drawings show desired and approximate locations of

equipment. Actual locations, distances, and levels shall be governed by field

conditions.

31

Quazite is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Orange, Connecticut.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 174 of 315


26 05 33 – 9

3.3 GENERAL

A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70, the Specifications, and the Drawings.

Fasten equipment to structural members or metal supports attached to structure or

to concrete surfaces

B. Install complete systems of raceways and boxes for wiring systems.

C. Install raceways and boxes according to the NEC, the manufacturer’s instructions,

and requirements in this Section.

D. Raceway termination points and box locations shown on the Drawings are in

approximate locations unless dimensioned.

E. Raceway routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless

dimensioned. Coordinate routing with structure and with work of other trades.

Route as required for a complete wiring system.

F. Ground and bond raceways and boxes as required in Section 26 05 26,

“Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

G. Support raceways and boxes in accordance with the requirements the National

Electrical Code, Section 26 05 29, “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.”

H. Identify raceways and boxes as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for


I. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.

J. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes or raceways.

3.4 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. For low-voltage wiring systems (less than 1000 volts) use conduit materials

according to the NEC and the following:

1. Outdoors – in Tank Farm:

a. Direct buried: Use plastic-coated RMC, minimum 1” diameter.

Install with 12-in. minimum cover from top of conduit to finished

grade for in-farm traffic areas or a minimum depth of 6 in. in non-

traffic areas.

2. Outdoors – exposed: Use RMC.

3. Outdoors – concealed: Use RMC for concealed outdoor work. Do not use

bare RMC or IMC in direct contact with earth.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 175 of 315


26 05 33 – 10

4. Outdoors – underground not in Tank Farm:

a. Direct buried: Use plastic-coated RMC or RNC Schedule 40 or 80

listed and marked for direct burial, 18-in. minimum cover from top

of conduit to finished grade.

b. All 90º Bends shall be PVC coated RMC or tape wrapped RMC.

5. Indoors – exposed outside of designated electrical rooms or

telecommunications rooms:

a. Exposed to severe physical damage during or after installation:

Use RMC.

b. Not exposed to deteriorating agents and not subject to severe

physical damage during or after installation: Use RMC or EMT.

6. Indoors – concealed:

a. Within concrete floors: Use RMC or RNC type EB.

b. Direct-buried under building floor slabs on grade: PVC-coated

rigid or RNC type DB or EB. Locate top of conduits not less than

0 in. below the bottom of the concrete slab

7. Connection to vibrating equipment (including hydraulic, pneumatic, or

electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment) – Use a minimum of 24 in.;

maximum length as determined by the NEC:

a. Outdoors: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

b. Wet, damp, or corrosive indoor locations: Use liquidtight flexible

metal conduit.

c. Dry indoor locations: Use flexible metal conduit.

B. For medium-voltage wiring systems (1 kV or greater but less than 100 kV) use

conduit materials in accordance with Section 26 10 00, “Medium Voltage

Electrical Distribution.”

C. Use 3/4-in. above ground or larger conduit to enclose multiple conductors larger

than 12 AWG.

D. Install conduits with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance

considering the type of building construction and obstructions.

E. Use specified fitting for conduit except that threaded hubs and sealing type

locknuts shall be used outdoors and locations where moisture is present. Use

couplings where required. Do not use running threads.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 176 of 315


26 05 33 – 11

F. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to boxes in damp and wet locations.

G. Use galvanized steel locknuts and insulated bushings for attachment to

enclosures, except threaded hubs or sealing type locknuts shall be used outdoors

or where moisture is present. Use watertight fittings for entries into NEMA 4

enclosures. Use sealing locknuts into bottoms of NEMA 4 or 3R enclosures.

H. Install insulating bushings or connectors with an insulated throat to protect

conductors or cables at conduit terminations.

I. Stub-Up Connections:

1. Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding

equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs,

and set flush with the finished floor or equipment pad.

2. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal

conduit may be used 6 in. above the floor.

3. Where equipment connections are not made under this Subcontract, install

threaded insert plugs set flush with the floor.

J. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe

nonmetallic conduits dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of

cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes,

minimum.

K. Install plastic-coated RMC and fittings according to the NEC and manufacturer’s

instructions. Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks

and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.

L. Make elbows, offsets, and bends uniform and symmetrical. Bend conduit with

approved bending devices.

M. Do not use RNC 90 degree elbows larger than 2 in. trade size; use plastic-coated

RMC, tape-wrapped RMC.

N. Maintain the following minimum clearances between conduit and surfaces with

temperatures exceeding 104°F (40°C):

1. 6 in. at perpendicular crossings.

2. 12 in. between parallel runs.

O. Cut ends square, ream, and remove burrs. Conduit shall be clean, dry, and free of

debris. Immediately after installation, plug or cap exposed ends with standard

accessories until wires are installed.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 177 of 315


26 05 33 – 12

P. Avoid moisture traps in conduit system; provide junction boxes with drain fitting

at low points in conduit system.

Q. Install corrosion protection tape on metal conduits and fittings in contact with soil

using half-lapped wrappings.

R. Install grounding bushings at the following locations:

1. At every entry to enclosures on metallic conduits containing circuits rated

100 amperes and higher.

2. On metallic conduits entering enclosures through concentric, eccentric, or

oversize knockouts.

3. On metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without

effective electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded bushings.

S. Install conduit measuring tape in empty raceways. Leave not less than 12 in. of

slack at each end of the tape. Secure each end of tape.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install an NRTL approved firestop system at each electrical penetration in a fire-

rated wall, floor, or partition.

B. At least two days prior to firestopping installation, notify TOC Construction

Representative so that arrangements can be made for inspection during

installation.

3.6 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install outlet boxes with centers at the following heights unless noted otherwise

on the Drawings:

1. Receptacle, telephone and data outlets:

a. 48-in. above finished floor unless otherwise noted.

b. Outside 18-in. above grade, unless otherwise noted.

2. Light switches: Center 48-in. above finished floor and within 6 in. of door

frame.

3. Thermostats: Center 60-in. above finished floor.

B. Where the Drawings show outlets as adjacent, align outlet boxes with each other

and group them symmetrically.

C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section

26 27 26, “Wiring Devices.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 178 of 315


26 05 33 – 13

D. Install a multi-gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not

use sectional type boxes.

E. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

F. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

G. Support boxes independently of conduit.

H. Install a blank cover plate on each outlet box in which no device is installed.

3.7 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install pull and junction boxes as shown on the Drawings and as required for

splices, taps, wire pulling, and compliance with regulatory requirements.

B. Install pull boxes as required to comply with limits on conduit bends and distance

between pull points in the CONDUIT INSTALLATION article of this Section.

C. Install indoor pull and junction boxes in accessible locations. Position boxes so

covers can be removed. Place boxes to maintain headroom.

3.8 WIREWAY INSTALLATION

A. Install wireways at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Mount plumb and level.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.

B. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

C. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by

the manufacturer.


A. For conduits, junction boxes, associated fittings and supports, verify appropriate

torque values are in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings and

finishes are without damage or deterioration at final inspection.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 179 of 315


26 05 53 – 1

SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Component identification tags.

B. Equipment nameplates.

C. Wire markers.

D. Voltage markers.

E. Warning signs.

F. Working space labels.

G. Underground warning tape.

H. Arc Flash labels.

I. Conduit labels.







A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI Z535.1 Safety Color Code

ANSI Z535.2 Environmental and Facility Safety Signs

ANSI Z535.3 Criteria for Safety Symbols and Labels

ANSI Z535.4 Product Safety Signs and Labels

ANSI Z535.5 Safety Tags and Barricade Tapes (for Temporary

Hazards)

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 180 of 315


26 05 53 – 2


29 CFR 1910.145 Danger and Caution Specifications

C. International Standards Organization (ISO)

ISO 3864 Graphical Symbols Package



NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace


UL 969 Marking and Labeling Systems

F. Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC



1.3 SUBMITTALS



Not used.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of the NEC, NFPA 70E, and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Conform to applicable requirements of ANSI Z535.1, Z535.2, Z535.3, Z535.4,

and Z535.5.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in the Subcontract Documents, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer’s

wiring diagrams, with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145.

Use consistent designations throughout Project

B. Deleted.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 181 of 315


26 05 53 – 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted; as identified in the SOW.

2.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS

A. Furnish component identification tags as specified and scheduled on the

Drawings.

B. Provide tags made of materials shown on the drawings.

2.3 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Furnish equipment nameplates at each switchboard, disconnect switches,

distribution panel, transformer, and variable frequency drive (VFD) as specified

on the Drawings.

B. Equipment nameplates: Laminated plastic, as shown on Drawings. Engraved

nomenclature sharp and clear. Engraved manufacturer’s standard nameplates may

be used if equal in quality and legibility.

C. Post conductor color code on each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear assembly,

motor control center. Use type-written, adhesive-backed labels.

D. Coordinate equipment nameplate schedule with equipment numbering scheme

provided by TOC Construction Representative.

2.4 WIRE MARKERS

A. Provide wire markers for power circuit wires.

B. Furnish split sleeve or heat-shrinkable sleeve, wire markers.

C. Locate a wire marker on each conductor at each switchboard, disconnect

switches, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, VFD, and each load

connection.

D. Provide typewritten lettering on wire markers for as-built branch circuit or feeder

circuit number.

E. Manufacturer: LEM Products, Inc., Brady, Panduit.

2.5 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Furnish voltage markers for each switchboard, disconnect switches, terminal box,

distribution panel, transformer, VFD, and cabinets.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 182 of 315


26 05 53 – 4

B. Provide flexible pressure sensitive vinyl markers with minimum 1-in. x 4-in.

orange background and black letters.

C. Provide voltage markers with lettering indicating the highest voltage present:

1. 480Y/277 and 480 V system: 480 V.

D. Manufacturer: Electromark, LEM Products, Inc.

2.6 WARNING SIGNS

A. Furnish warning signs for each switchboard, disconnect switches, terminal box,

distribution panel, transformer, VFD, and cabinets.

B. Use warning signs that conform to ANSI Z535.4 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

C. Provide minimum 2-in. x 4-in. warning signs.

D. Provide warning signs with format and lettering as follows:

1. Signal word: DANGER

2. Signal word panel color: red with safety alert symbol.

3. Word message:

Keep Out!

Hazardous voltage inside

Will shock, burn, or cause death.

4. Safety symbol: ISO 3864 “lightning bolt” in yellow triangle.

E. Materials:

1. Use flexible, pressure sensitive, polyester base with polyester

overlaminate.

F. Manufacturer: Seton Name Plate Co., Safety Label Solutions, Hazard

Communication Systems, Electromark.

2.7 WORKING SPACE LABELS

A. Provide labels indicating required working clearance at electrical equipment that

is likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while

energized.

B. Material:

1. Use polyester label stock that is NRTL-recognized to UL 969 and has a

high-adhesion adhesive back.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 183 of 315


26 05 53 – 5

2. Use printing ribbon recommended by the label stock manufacturer.

3. Use a suitable thermal transfer process label-printing machine to generate

labels and enter the application-specific information.

4. Outdoor labels shall be suitable for a high-UV environment.

C. Minimum dimensions: 3 1/2 x 1 1/4 in.

D. Use the following label design:

NOTICE Keep area in front of this electrical

equipment clear for #-#/# feet.

OSHA-NEC regulations.

1. Signal word: “NOTICE” in 24-point minimum white italic letters on

safety blue panel.

2. Word message: 16-point minimum black or safety blue letters on white

background.

a. Word message for 151 to 600 Volt equipment with exposed live

parts on one side of the working space and no live or grounded

parts on the other side of the working space: “Keep area in front of

this electrical equipment clear for 3 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

b. Word message for 151 to 600 Volt equipment with exposed live

parts on one side of the working space and grounded parts on the

other side of the working space: “Keep area in front of this

electrical equipment clear for 3 1/2 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

c. Word message for 151 to 600 Volt equipment with exposed live

parts on both sides of the working space: “Keep area in front of

this electrical equipment clear for 4 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

d. Word message for 0 to150 Volt equipment with exposed live parts

on one side of the working space and live or grounded parts on the

other side of the working space: “Keep area in front of this

electrical equipment clear for 3 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

E. Manufacturer: Brother, Seton, Brady

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 184 of 315


26 05 53 – 6

2.8 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Furnish underground warning tape for underground cables, conduits and duct

banks.

B. Use 6-in. wide, 0.004-in. thick, polyethylene detectable underground warning tape

black lettering and the following background colors:

1. Electric: Red

C. Provide lettering that indicates the type service buried below.

1. Electric: “CAUTION ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW”

D. Manufacturer: Utility Safeguard, LLC, Detectable Terra Tape, Reef Industries,

Inc.

2.9 ARC FLASH LABELS

A. Install arc flash labels on electrical equipment as required by NEC.

2.10 CONDUIT LABELING

A. Conduit metal tags shall be affixed to all numbered conduit. Conduit numbers are

shown on Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive identification products for compliance with

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the

identification products. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory


3.2 INSTALLATION – GENERAL

A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install

identification after completion of finish work.

B. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and

doors.

D. Install electrical identification products only when ambient temperature and

humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 185 of 315


26 05 53 – 7

E. Clean surface where electrical identification product is to be placed.

F. Use manufacturer’s recommended adhesive for engraved tags and nameplates.

G. Place electrical identification products centered and parallel to equipment lines.

3.3 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS

A. Install component identification tag as indicated on the Drawings on the front of

each piece of electrical equipment including switchboards, MCCs, distribution

panels, transformers, and VFDs.

B. Position tags so they can be read from floor or ground.

3.4 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Install equipment nameplate or nameplates as indicated on the Drawings on the

front of each piece of electrical equipment including switchboards, MCCs,

distribution panels, transformers, and VFDs.

B. Position nameplates so they can be read from floor or ground.

3.5 WIRE MARKERS

A. Install wire markers on power conductors at each appearance in locations such as

switchboards, MCCs, distribution panels, transformers, and VFDs, and load

connections.

B. Position markers so they can be read from the front of the enclosure.

3.6 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Install voltage markers at the following locations and position markers so they can

be read from floor or ground:

1. Front of each free-standing low-voltage switchboard section.

2. Front of each switchboard, MCC, distribution panel, transformer, and

VFD.

3. Cover of each pull box containing low-voltage conductors.

3.7 WARNING SIGNS

A. Install warning signs at the following locations and position signs so they can be

read from floor or ground:

1. Front of each switchboard disconnect switches, terminal box, distribution

panel, transformer, VFD, pull boxes, and cabinets.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 186 of 315


26 05 53 – 8

3.8 WORKING SPACE LABELS

A. Install working space labels in front of switchboards, MCCs, distribution panels,

transformers, and VFDs.

B. Any other equipment likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or

maintenance while energized.

3.9 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Install underground warning tape in trench above underground conduit.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 187 of 315


26 10 00 – 1

SECTION 26 10 00

MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes requirements for material and installation of equipment for

the 13.8 kV medium voltage systems.







A. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC)

AEIC C56 Specification for Ethylene Propylene Rubber

Insulated Shielded Power Cables Rated for 5kV

through 69kV

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI C2, 2012 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

ANSI C37.47 High Voltage Current-Limiting Type Distribution

Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnect Switches


ASTM B502 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Clad Steel

Core Wire for Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-

Clad Steel Reinforced

ASTM B549 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded

Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel

Reinforced (ACSR/AW)

ASTM D1535 Method for Specifying Color by Munsell System

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 188 of 315


26 10 00 – 2

D. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA)

AWPA C7 Western red cedar, northern white cedar and Alaska

yellow cedar poles – preservative treatment of

incised pole butts by the thermal process (no s/s

document

AWPA P Standard for field cuts, creosote for brush or spray

treatment

E. Factory Mutual (FM)

FM 3990 Less or Nonflammable Liquid-Insulated

Transformers

F. Federal Specification (FS)

TT-S-00230C AMD 2 Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single

Component (for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in

Buildings and Other Structures)

G. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

C57.12.00 General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed

Distribution, Power and Regulating Transformers

H. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

ICEA S-68-516 Ethylene-Propylene Insulated Wire & Cable for the

Transmission & Distribution

ICEA S-93-639 5-46kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the

Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy

I. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA RN 1 PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel

Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA C80.1 Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

NEMA TC 2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit

NEMA TC 3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with

Rigid PVC Conduti and Tubing

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 189 of 315


26 10 00 – 3

NEMA TC 6 & 8 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastics Utilities Duct for

Underground Installations

NEMA TC 7 Smoothwall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene

Conduit

NEMA TC 9 Fittings for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic

Utilities Duct for Underground Installation

NEMA WC 74 5-46kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the

Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy

J. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


K. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 6 Rigid Steel Conduit

UL 508A, 2014 Industrial Control Panels

UL 514B Conduit, Tubing and able Fittings

UL 514C Standard for Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-

Device Boxes, and Covers

UL 651 Standard for Schedule 40, 80 Type EB and A Rigid

PVC Conduit and Fittings

UL 651A Schedule 40 and 80 High Density Polyethelene

(HDPE) Conduit

UL 1072 Medium-Voltage Power Cables

L. Hanford Documents

TFC-ENG-STD-15 Raceway System Standard

TFC-PRJ-P-C-02 NEC Compliance Inspection

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for each enclosure, including

dimensioned plans and elevations and component lists. Include front and

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 190 of 315


26 10 00 – 4

side views of enclosure showing overall dimensions, enclosure type,

enclosure finish, unit locations, and conduit entrances. Include the

following:

a. Configuration and current ratings of equipment.

b. Short-circuit current rating of equipment.

c. Rated Voltage and BIL.

d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

protective devices and auxiliary components.

2. Project Record Documents: Submit project record documents to include

specified certifications and all field test reports.


A. Inspections: The electrical installation shall meet the requirements of the NEC, as

administered by the NEC electrical inspector and the MSA Electrical Utilities

Group for the NESC portion.

B. Electrical Product Acceptability: Electrical equipment shall be listed or labeled

by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), such as UL, when a

category exists.

Note: NRTLs are listed on the Occupational Safety and Health Administration

web site at http://www.osha.gov/dts/otpca/nrtl/index.html#nrtls.

1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure the listing is appropriate for

the equipment specified. For equipment without a listing or label by a

NRTL, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain a listing or

label. Any component, equipment, assembly, or system without a NRTL

listing or label shall be subject to the approval of the NEC electrical

inspector.

2. The Seller shall arrange for a WRPS Hanford NEC inspection to occur at

Seller’s facility prior to shipping any assembly not covered in whole by a

NRTL listing or label.

3. Cabinets containing assembled control systems shall be designed,

constructed, and listed or labeled to the UL 508A Standard, as applicable.

C. Obtain EIPs (Electrical Installation Permit) (Form A-6005-707) prior to

performing any electrical installation or modification. See TFC-PRJ-P-C-02,

NEC Compliance Inspection.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 191 of 315


26 10 00 – 5

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be substituted if approved by the TOC Construction

Representative.

B. Materials

1. Solderless terminals for insulated aerial conductors: circumferential

compression type: Burndy Corporation HYLUG Type YA for copper

conductors and Type YA-A for aluminum conductors.

C. Conduit:

1. Rigid Steel NEMA C80.1 and UL 6.

2. Conduit and Conduit Fittings Plastic, Rigid NEMA TC 9, UL 514B,

UL 514C, UL 651, UL 651A.

3. Type DB PVC RNC EPC 40 (Schedule 40) & EPC 80 (Schedule 80)

NEMA TC 6 & 8, UL 514B, UL 514C, UL 651, UL 651A.

4. Type HDPE RNC EPEC NEMA TC 7, UL 514B, UL 514C, UL 651,

UL 651A.

D. PVC coating on rigid steel conduit: NEMA RN 1, Type A-40, factory applied.

E. Wood Poles: ANSI 05.1, western red cedar, or Douglas fir cut from live timber.

Pole shall be butt-treated by manufacture in accordance with AWPA C7, using

AWPA P preservatives. Each pole shall be given single top cut at 30-degree

angle with normal to axis of pole and at right angle to sweep. Gains shall be cut

so roof will be at right angles to the line and sweep of the pole will be in line.

Roofs and gains shall be brush treated by manufacture with specified preservative.

Each gain shall fit crossarm tightly. Bolt holes shall not be more than 1/16 in.

oversize.

F. Crossarms: Straight-grained Douglas fir, free from twists to within 0.1 in. per

foot of length, with bends and twists in only one direction. Apply preservatives to

crossarms in accordance with AWPA C25, with retention of 8 pounds per cubic

foot.

G. Line Conductors: #4 ACSR (Swanate) in accordance with ASTM B-230,

ASTM B-502, and ASTM B-549.

H. Pole line materials: See Attachment A, “Hanford Electrical Utilities Distribution

Guide Specifications & Standard Details.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 192 of 315


26 10 00 – 6

I. Load Break Elbows: 15 kV Cooper Power Systems 500-10 Series.

J. The cables specified on Drawings as 15 kV shall be single-conductor, shielded,

solid-dielectric type rated for 105°C normal operation. The cables shall be listed

by UL as Type MV-150 and have a 15,000-V rating. All cables shall be “sunlight

resistant.”

K. The conductor shall be stranded copper, sized in accordance with the drawings.

The insulation level shall be 133% of rated voltage with a minimum thickness of

220 mils per requirements of ICEA S-68-516, UL 1072, and AEIC C56.

L. The cables shall conform to the following:

1. Cables shall be suitable for use in wet and dry locations, underground duct

systems.

2. Conductors shall be Class B Compact Copper, per ICEA S-68-516, Part 2

and UL 1072.

3. Each conductor shall be covered with an extruded semi-conducting

polymeric material applied over the surface of the conductor that is

compatible with the insulation.

4. The insulation applied over the extruded strand screen shall be high-

quality ethylene propylene blended and compounded within the cable

manufacturer’s facilities under optimum conditions of cleanliness.

5. The type of insulation shielding – copper tape shielding: each conductor

shall have a bare 5-mil minimum thick copper shielding tape helically

applied over the insulation shield with a minimum 25% overlap of the tape

width.

6. Wire pulling compound: Electro Compound Company “Y-er Eas,” or

American Polywater Corporation “Polywater.”

M. Tape

1. Plastic insulating tape: 3M Company “Scotch No. 33+;”

2. Conduit protection tape: 3M Company “Scotchrap™17

No. 50;” and

3. Silicon rubber termination tape: 3M Company “Scotch No. 70.”

N. Insulating putty: 3M Company “Scotchfil™17

,” General Electric Company No.

8389, or Kearney Company “Airseal.”

O. Provide medium voltage equipment as shown on the Drawings. Transformers are

provided by others.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 193 of 315


26 10 00 – 7

P. Provide Load Break Elbows complete with inserts, on the transformer primary

connection: 15 kV, 200A load break connector, Cooper 500-10 series.

Q. Lightning arrestors for transformer: Metal oxide, elbow shaped, with metal oxide

varistor, rated at 18 kV (15.3 MCOV), in premolded insulating elbow designed

for use with the RTE 200 A 8.3/14.4 kV loadbreak bushings that are on the

transformer.

R. Lightning arresters: Pole mounted, distributed valve type, rated at 18 kV

(15.3 MCOV)

S. Provide cable terminations rated at 15 kV, heat shrink type with anti-tracking for

shielded cable, Raychem HVT Series as shown on the Drawings.


A. Cable inspection: Upon delivery to the worksite, inspect cable and reels for

shipping damage such as the following:

1. Marks caused by improper lifting equipment or techniques;

2. Breaks or cuts in outer covering;

3. Damaged jacket or insulation;

4. Reel damage from mishandling; and

5. Damaged or missing high voltage cable and seals.

B. Cable testing: Upon installation at the worksite, perform direct current (dc)

over – potential tests on new cable. The specifics of how to perform the tests will

be provided by the MSA Electrical Utilities Group.

C. Cable Reel Storage

1. Store reels with flanges resting on hard surface or pallet to prevent sinking

into the ground;

2. Reel flanges shall not touch cable on other reels;

3. Do not store reels on sides. Store with reel axis horizontal; and

4. Cap or tape cable ends to prevent entrance of moisture.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 194 of 315


26 10 00 – 8

D. Cable Reel Handling

1. Slings and forklifts shall not contact cable or protective covering;

2. Use spreader bars when lifting reels with bar and sling; and

3. Do not drop reels.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Perform work in accordance with TFC-ENG-STD-15, the NEC, and

ANSI C2.

2. Install products as shown on the drawings, specifications and per the

manufacturer’s recommendation for the pad mounted transformer. Use

appropriate calibrated special tools when installing devices for which

special installation tools are recommended by manufacturers.

3. Conduit excavation and backfill shall be as specified on the Drawings and

Division 31.

4. Watthour/VAR meters: Before installation, have meters electrically

calibrated by the MSA Electrical Utilities Group. All meter wiring to the

current transformers will be by the MSA Electrical Utilities Group.

5. Provide all necessary final field adjustments for a complete installation

B. Setting Poles

1. Excavate holes large enough to admit tamping bar around pole at butt. Do

not use explosives to excavate holes.

2. Use backfill materials that can be solidly compacted by hand tamping in

6 in. lifts. Compact surplus earth around pole in cone 1 ft high above

grade. Add additional backfill where backfill has settled, and tamp before

completion of work.

3. Minimum pole depth is 10% of pole height, plus 2’-0”, i.e., set 40-ft poles

6 ft, 0 in. in earth. Measure depth from lowest side, on moderately sloping

ground and from point 2 ft, 6 in. from center of pole toward low side on

steep slopes, cuts, embankments, or where soil is likely to be washed away

from pole.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 195 of 315


26 10 00 – 9

4. Set poles plumb and in line, except that corners and other strain points that

are guyed shall have butts displaced to keep tops in line where feasible.

At such locations, rake against strain shall be approximately 3 in. for each

10 ft of height.

5. Backfill holes created by removal of poles and other underground

structures to finish grade and solidly compact by hand tamping. Where

backfill has settled, place additional backfill and tamp before completion

of work.

C. Crossarms

1. Mount at right angles to axis of poles or as shown on the drawings.

2. Bolts shall be of sufficient length for full-thread engagement of nut, but

not protrude through poles or arms in excess of 2 in. Bolt ends shall not

be cut off. Use square washers with each through-bolt and double-arming

bolt to protect pole and crossarms.

D. Guys and Anchors

1. Install anchors to bear against undisturbed earth. Tamp backfill around

anchors entire depth of hole. Provide temporary guying required during

stringing of conductors. Remove at completion of work.

2. Set guy rods in earth in line with strand and install at least 6 in. above

grade.

E. Insulators: Tighten pin insulators on pin threads and adjust top groove so it is

parallel with line. Secure hold nuts with palnuts.

F. Aerial Conductors

1. Clearances shall be maintained for cables and conductors in accordance

with the Drawings, and ANSI C2.

2. String conductors from rotating reels and do not drag along ground nor

permit conductors to lie where they may be run over by vehicles. Pull

conductors through stringing sheaves or stringing blocks hung on

messenger cable, but do not pull around sharp corners. Inspect conductors

as they leave reels and cut out weak or damaged sections and splice ends.

Do not make splices in adjacent spans, dead end spans, or within 4 ft of

support. Install conductors to proper stringing tensions in accordance with


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 196 of 315


26 10 00 – 10

3. Make splices under tension mechanically, and electrically secure by

compression fittings. Do not use self-gripping or automatic-tension

splicing sleeves. Make taps between primary wires, jumpers, etc., with

mechanical connectors.

4. Install hot-line stirrups on existing conductors where new feeder taps are

made.

5. Sag conductors in accordance with ANSI C2 for medium loading district.

G. Aerial Equipment Grounding

1. Ground fused switches and lightning arresters in accordance with the

Drawings. Bond together pole line hardware separated by less than 2 in.

2. Ground systems: Use stranded copper conductors for ground conductors

installed in earth. Use solid copper conductors above grade. Make joints

connecting copper and galvanized steel above grade and in dry location.

Connections may be made with ground rod clamps or exothermic welds.

H. Conduits

1. Use galvanized rigid steel unless specified otherwise on the drawings.

2. Use PVC conduit in contact with earth. Install in accordance with


3. Install concealed conduits as directed with PVC-coated rigid steel elbows

with bend radii as long as possible.

4. Make elbows, offsets, and bends uniform and symmetrical. Bend conduit

with approved bending devices.

5. Cut conduit ends square, ream, and remove burrs. Conduit shall be clean,

dry, and free of debris. Immediately after installation, plug or cap exposed

ends with standard accessories until wires are installed.

6. Use one hole clamp equipped with clampbacks or framing strut with

clamps to secure conduits as shown on drawings.

7. Set up joints in conduit installed exposed to weather, with high

temperature, anti-seize, conduit thread lubricant and sealant.

8. Install exposed conduit stubbing up, straight and plumb, lined up, and

uniformly spaced.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 197 of 315


26 10 00 – 11

9. Install warning tape for underground conduit as shown on the drawings

and with materials specified in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for


I. Cable Pulling and Terminations

1. Use lubricant recommended by cable manufacturer, or wire-pulling

compound specified, when pulling wire and cable through conduit.

2. Do not install or handle wires with thermoplastic insulation or jacket when

ambient temperature is 15°F or below.

3. Make terminations with solderless connectors. Use connectors in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Follow manufacturer’s instructions and directions for stress cones, and

cable terminations. Final terminations to power source will be performed

by Mission Support Alliance Electric Utilities.

5. Ground pad mounted transformers to ground grid with 4/0 cable.


A. Testing

1. Furnish equipment and instruments required to perform testing.

2. Use instruments which bear calibration stamps showing dates of

calibration and expiration dates of stamps. Calibration and accuracy of

instruments shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory having

standards traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

3. Test the equipment and wiring for continuity and unintentional grounds,

and verify proper phase sequence and voltage at equipment served before

attempt is made to operate equipment. Notify the NEC electrical inspector

and the Mission Support Alliance Electrical Utilities Group before start of

tests. Record the results.

4. Reconnect devices disconnected during testing

B. Acceptance testing: After installation, and prior to energizing, coordinate with

MSA Electrical Utilities to perform tests on cable to verify installation

acceptability.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 198 of 315


26 10 00 – 12

C. Verification Points

1. Provide 24-hour notice and hold for release by MSA Electrical Utilities

Group.

2. Prior to energizing, perform NEC inspection.

D. Deleted.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 199 of 315


26 22 13 – 1

SECTION 26 22 13

LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. General-purpose dry-type low-voltage transformers







A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA TP 1 Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for

Distribution Transformers

NEMA TP 2 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Energy

Consumption of Distribution Transformers

NEMA TP 3 Standard for the Labeling of Distribution

Transformer Efficiency



C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment

Directory


UL 1561 Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 200 of 315


26 22 13 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Statement

of Work and the Project submittal procedures.

Not Used.

B. Submit the following for WRPS review/approval:

Not Used.






C. Provide products that comply with the following industry standards:

1. NEMA TP 1.

2. NEMA TP 2.

3. NEMA TP 3.

4. UL 1561.



instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Statement of Work

2.2 GENERAL

A. Transformers shall be NRTL listed to UL 1561 and shall be tested and labeled

according to NEMA TP 1, NEMA TP 2, and NEMA TP 3.

B. The efficiency of each transformer shall be NEMA TP 1 Class I when tested in

accordance with NEMA TP 2. Transformer efficiency shall be indicated on a

label that conforms to NEMA TP 3.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 201 of 315


26 22 13 – 3

C. Transformer coils may be aluminum or copper with continuous wound

construction and shall be impregnated with non-hygroscopic, thermosetting

varnish. Terminations shall be brazed or welded to the coil conductor.

D. Transformer cores shall be constructed of a high grade, non-aging silicon steel

with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current losses.

Magnetic flux densities shall be kept well below the saturation point.

2.3 GENERAL-PURPOSE DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS

A. The core and coil shall be bolted to the base of the enclosure, isolated by means of

rubber vibration-absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact

between the core and the enclosure. Sound isolation systems requiring the

complete removal of all fastening devices will not be acceptable.

B. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by a

flexible grounding conductor sized following applicable UL and NEC Standards.

C. The transformer enclosure shall be ventilated and shall be fabricated of a heavy

gauge, sheet steel construction. The entire enclosure shall be finished using a

process consisting of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing followed by

electrostatic deposition of polymer polyester powder and baking cycle to provide

a uniform coating of all edges and surfaces. The coating shall be UL recognized

for outdoor use. The coating color shall be light or medium grey.

D. Transformers shall be suitable for rack or floor mounting. Provide mounting

accessories required for installation.

E. Provide weather shields for transformers installed outdoors.

F. Provide transformer manufacturer’s transformer lug kits with compression type

equipment lugs and hardware for connecting conductors to transformer terminals.

G. Provide factory assembled and tested, energy-efficient, general-purpose, air

cooled, two-winding, dry-type transformers with voltage and kVA ratings as

indicated on the Drawings.

H. General-purpose transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be 150°C temperature rise

above 40°C ambient. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall

not exceed 50°C rise above a 40°C ambient.

I. Transformers 15 kVA and larger shall have a minimum of two 2.5 percent full

capacity above normal and four 2.5 percent full capacity below normal primary

taps.

J. Manufacturers:

1. Square D Class 7400 Type “EE.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 202 of 315


26 22 13 – 4

2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer “DS-3”and “DT-3.”

2.4 MINI-POWER ZONE

A. Provide mini-power zone, 480-120/240V, single phase transformer and

120/240V, panelboard in a weather-resistant enclosure. Minipower zone shall be

UL listed, surface mounted and sized as shown on the Drawings. Branch and

secondary main circuit breakers shall be provided as shown on the panel schedule.

Locking mechanisms permanently affixed to the panel board to prevent casual

operation of breakers shall be provided.

B. General-purpose transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be 150°C temperature rise

above 40°C ambient.

C. Mini-power zone units shall have a minimum of two 2.5 percent full capacity

below normal primary taps.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Square D, Class 7440 “MiniPower Zone”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned dry-type transformers as shown on design

media.

B. Maintain access to existing dry-type transformers and other installations that are

to remain active.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive transformers for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the control system. Do

not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install dry-type transformers where indicated on the Drawings and according to

manufacturer’s instructions. Manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be

available at the construction site.

B. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for access, replacement, and for

cooling air circulation. Locate the front and rear of each ventilated transformer at

least 6 in. from the wall or any obstruction to allow proper air circulation.

C. Make conduit connections to transformer enclosure only at locations designated

by the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 203 of 315


26 22 13 – 5

D. Connect conductors to transformer terminals using transformer manufacturer’s

lug kits. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s

published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not

furnished, use those specified Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables,” Attachment 1, “Recommended Tightening Torque per

UL 486A-486B.”

E. Bond transformers and ground systems served by transformers according to

Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

F. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Section 26 05 53,

“Identification for Electrical Systems.”


A. Clean, inspect, test, adjust, and energize transformers in accordance with


1. Inspect each transformer for physical damage, proper connection and

grounding, and proper anchorage.

2. Place records of inspections, tests, and adjustments in the work package or

fabrication document.

B. Coordinate inspections and tests with those required by other Sections.

C. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars

on finish to match original finish.

D. Measure primary and secondary voltages and phase rotation, and make

preliminary tap adjustments. After normal operating loads have been energized

adjust taps to provide the following voltage at points of use; record voltages and

tap settings.

System Nominal Voltage Minimum Load Voltage

480Y/277 460Y/265

208Y/120 200Y/115

120/240 115/230


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 204 of 315


26 24 13 – 1

SECTION 26 24 13

SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section covers installation of floor-mounted deadfront low-voltage switchboards

which consist of an enclosure, circuit breakers, instruments and metering

equipment, monitoring equipment or control equipment, with associated

interconnections and supporting structures. Uses on Project include:

1. Main Switchboard and Distribution Switchboard – are shown on the

Drawings and provided by RPP-SPEC-60125.



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this section.


extent designated in this section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date

of this section unless otherwise indicated.

A. Factory Mutual (FM) Research Corporation

Approval Guide


RPP-CALC-60221 Electrical Power Distribution Study for A/AX

Retrieval Infrastructure

RPP-CALC-60222 Electrical Power Distribution Study for A/AX

Retrieval Water Building

RPP-SPEC-60125 Procurement Specification for A/AX Retrieval

Project Switchboards

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

IEEE 100 The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards

Terms

D. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

NEMA PB 2 Deadfront Distribution Switchboards

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 205 of 315


26 24 13 – 2

NEMA PB 2.1 Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and

Maintenance of Deadfront Switchboards Rated

600 Volts or Less

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

7 NFPA 0 National Electrical Code (NEC)

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 67 Panelboards


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in

this Section are as defined in IEEE 100.







A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboard(s) according to the following:

1. Manufacturer’s written instructions.

1.6 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Conform to NEMA PB 2 service conditions during and after installation of

switchboards.


A. Verify field measurements against manufacturer’s shop drawings prior to

fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. Switchboards are provided by Procurement Specification RPP-SPEC-60125.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 206 of 315


26 24 13 – 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive switchboard(s) for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the product. Do not

proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboard(s) where indicated on the Drawings and according to

manufacturer’s instructions, NEMA PB-2, and the NEC. Have the

manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and temporary blocking of

moving parts from switchboard enclosure and components.

C. Ground and bond switchboards as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

D. Install conduits as required in Section 26 05 33, “Raceways and Boxes for


1. Terminate conduits in the switchboard section containing the

corresponding device.

2. Install plugged couplings set flush with the top of the concrete pad. After

switchboard is set in place, extend conduits to 1 1/4-in. above the pad and

terminate with insulated grounding bushings.

E. Install conductors as required in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables.”

1. Train conductors neatly in groups; bundle and secure as recommended by

manufacturer to withstand fault current.

2. Use compression type lugs to connect all service, feeder, and branch

circuit cables greater than 100 amperes.

3. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including bus bar and

grounding connections, according to the manufacturer’s published

torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not

indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify switchboard and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as

required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 207 of 315


26 24 13 – 4


A. Clean, inspect, test, and energize switchboards in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

B. Verify that circuit breakers are in the proper locations and that setting of solid

state trip devices and current sensor taps match values scheduled on the

Drawings.

C. Exercise each circuit breaker three times to verify smooth mechanical operation.

D. Verify proper torque of accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after

installing switchboard.

E. Coordinate inspections and tests with those required by other Sections in this

Specification.

F. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars


G. Perform field adjustments of the protective devices as required to place the

equipment in final operating condition. The settings shall be in accordance with

the approved short-circuit study, protective device evaluation study and protective

device coordination studies, RPP-CALC-60221 and RPP-CALC-60222.

H. Necessary field settings of devices, adjustments, and minor modifications to

equipment to accomplish conformance with an approved short circuit and

protective device coordination study shall be carried out by the Contractor at no

additional cost to the owner.

3.5 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICE

A. Provide the services of a factory trained representative from the manufacturer to

inspect and certify the installation and to oversee energizing and testing as

directed by TOC Engineering Representative.

B. Manufacturer’s representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been

installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 208 of 315


26 24 16 – 1

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Panelboards for feeder and branch circuit loads.







A. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

ISO 9001 Quality management systems – Requirements

B. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

NEMA AB 3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and their Application

NEMA PB 1 Panelboards

NEMA PB 1.1 General Instructions for Proper Installation,

Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated

600 volts or less

NEMA PB 2 Deadfront Distribution Switchboards


NFPA 70, 2014 National electrical Code (NEC)


UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-

Environmental Considerations

UL 67 Panelboards

UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 209 of 315


26 24 16 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Not Used.



B. Furnish products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing



C. Comply with NEMA PB 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA AB 3.

D. Comply with UL 67, UL 50, and UL 489.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to manufacturer’s

instructions.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish spare keys of each type for panelboard cabinet locks.

B. Deleted.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Furnish panelboards as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section.

B. Panelboards shall be UL 67 listed and shall conform to NEMA PB1.

C. Furnish panelboard cabinets for surface mounting as indicted on the Drawings.

1. Furnish enclosures as indicated below:

a. Outdoor – NEMA 3R: rated raintight minimum.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 210 of 315


26 24 16 – 3

b. Indoor – NEMA 12: Dust tight.

2. Cabinets shall be not less than 20-in. wide.

3. Furnish steel cabinets constructed according to UL 50 requirements.

4. NEMA 12, and 4 boxes shall have end walls welded and sealed.

D. Furnish trim fronts that meet the strength and rigidity requirements of UL 50.

1. Each panelboard trim front shall include a door.

2. Fronts shall have ANSI 49 medium gray enamel electro-deposited over

cleaned, phosphatized steel.

3. Furnish a panelboard circuit directory card in a metal frame mounted

inside the panelboard door. The directory card shall include spaces for

circuit numbers and sufficient spaces to allow each circuit to be described

in sufficient detail to be distinguished from all others.

a. Furnish cylindrical tumbler type locks for doors. Furnish sliding

vault locks with 3-point latching for enclosures more than 48-in.

high. Key all lock assemblies alike. Furnish two keys with each

lock plus spares as required in the Extra Materials paragraph

above.

E. Equip panelboards with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary

appurtenances, for the future installation of circuit breakers in the “spaces”

scheduled on the Drawings.

F. Furnish panelboards having NRTL-listed short circuit current ratings not less than

the available fault current indicated on the Drawings.

G. Furnish thermal-magnetic circuit breakers that meet the requirements of UL 489

and NEMA AB 3.

1. Furnish circuit breakers of the type, rating, and features as indicated on the

Drawings.

2. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

3. Furnish multi-pole breakers with a common trip.

4. Furnish bolt-on type circuit breakers or circuit breakers that connect to the

panel bus through positive gripping connector jaws and are secured by an

independent mechanical locking device.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 211 of 315


26 24 16 – 4

5. Furnish UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers or UL

Class B equipment protection circuit breakers where scheduled on

Drawings.

6. Furnish circuit breakers with provisions for connecting the size and

number of conductors indicated on the Drawings. Refer to

Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables,” for conductor connection requirements.

H. Furnish a permanently-installed handle lock-off device for each circuit breaker.

1. Furnish handle lock-off device that will accept a 1/4-in. padlock shackle.

2. Securely attach the device to the circuit breaker case; the attachment shall

not depending on a friction fit or the presence of the panelboard front for

the handle lock-off device to remain in place and be functional.

I. Manufacturers:

1. Eaton:

a. 480 V and 480Y/277 V: “PRL3a” and “PRL4”

b. 208Y/120 V and 120/240 V: “PRL1a” and “PRL2a”

2. Square D:

a. 480 V and 480Y/277 V: “NF” and “I-LINE”

b. 208Y/120 V and 120/240 V: “NQ” and “I-Line”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Do not proceed with

installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards where indicated on the Drawings and according to

manufacturer’s instructions, NEMA PB 1.1, and the NEC. Have the

manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Furnish supports in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 29,

“Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 212 of 315


26 24 16 – 5

C. Position panelboards so the top circuit breaker handle is not more than 6 ft – 7 in.

above the surface of the working space in front of the panelboard.

D. Ground and bond panelboards as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and


3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Furnish typed circuit directories for each branch circuit panelboard.

1. Install a plastic-laminated copy of the panel schedule drawing on the inner

side of the panelboard door.

B. Identify panelboards and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as



A. Clean, inspect, test, and energize panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions. Exercise each circuit breaker three times to verify smooth

mechanical operation.

B. Coordinate inspections and tests with those required by other Sections.

C. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 213 of 315


26 27 26 – 1

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Receptacles.

B. Snap switches.

C. Wall plates.







A. Federal Specifications (FS)

FS W-C-596 G/GEN Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification

for

FS W-P-455A Plate, Wall, Electrical

FS W-S-896 Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush

Mounted (General Specification)

B. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems -- Requirements

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices

NEMA WD 6 Wiring Devices—Dimensional Specifications



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 214 of 315


26 27 26 – 2


UL 20 General Use Snap Switches

UL 498 Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 943 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters

UL 1492 Solid-State Dimming Controls

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Not Used.


A. Comply with the NEC.

B. Furnish products listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing


environments in which installed.



instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Provide back and side wired, screw pressure terminal, straight-blade, and locking

type, receptacles as indicated on the drawings. Receptacles shall meet the

performance and design requirements of Federal Specification W-C-596G/GEN

and UL 498. Receptacle configurations shall be in accordance with

NEMA WD 6.

B. For 120 volt receptacles connected to individual branch circuits provide straight-

blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding duplex receptacles.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 215 of 315


26 27 26 – 3

Receptacle mounting strap, ground terminal, and ground contacts shall be formed

from one piece of brass alloy. Manufacturer: Hubbell “HBL5362” or equal.

C. For GFCI receptacles connected to individual branch circuits provide straight-

blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding, “feed through” type, self-

testing GFCI, duplex receptacle that meet the requirements of UL 943. Provide

units that can be installed in a 2 3/4-in. deep outlet box without an adapter.

Manufacturer: Hubbell “GFR5362ST” or equal.

D. Provide straight-blade and twist lock receptacles for special applications as

indicated on the Drawings.

E. Provide 480 VAC, 3 wire, 4 pole, receptacles, amperage as shown on drawings.

Manufacturer: Crouse Hinds.

2.3 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Provide single pole, double pole, three-way, four-way and illuminated handle

snap switches as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Switches shall be rated 20 amperes, 120-277 volts AC, back and side wired, screw

pressure terminal, quiet type AC switch with yoke grounding screw. Switches

shall meet the performance and design requirements of UL 20 and Federal

Specification WS896.

C. Manufacturer: Hubbell “HBL1220” series.

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. For surface mounted interior receptacles and switches, furnish galvanized steel

4-in. square raised surface covers. Receptacles installed in raised covers shall be

secured by more than one screw. Manufacturer: RACO “800” series.

B. For GFCI receptacles in damp or wet locations provide weatherproof, in use

covers. Manufacturer: Hubbell “WP26E”

C. Provide single, multi-gang, and combination type wall plates that mate and match

with corresponding wiring devices.

D. Use metal plate-securing screws to match plate finish.

E. Terminal Blocks

1. Terminal Blocks shall meet the requirements of UL 1059 or NEMA ICS 4.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 216 of 315


26 27 26 – 4

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper locations and heights.

B. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for

connection to wiring devices.

C. Clean debris from outlet boxes before installing devices.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products following manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s

installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Install devices plumb, level, and secure.

C. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, mount devices with long

dimension vertical, and grounding point of receptacles on top. Group adjacent

switches and receptacles under single, multi-gang wall plates.

D. Do not use the duplex/split-wire break-off tabs in receptacles as circuit conductors

for connecting downstream devices.

E. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes on surface

mounted outlets.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding

conductor.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify wiring devices with circuit number as required in Section 26 05 53,

“Identification for Electrical Systems.”


A. Inspect each wiring device for defects before installing.

B. Operate each operable device with circuit energized; verify proper operation.

C. Test 20 ampere receptacles for proper polarity and ground continuity using an

NRTL listed test device that impresses a momentary current of at least

15 amperes on the branch circuit conductors and equipment grounding path.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 217 of 315


26 27 26 – 5

D. Test ground-fault circuit interrupter receptacle operation according to

manufacturer recommendations.

E. Replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean devices and wall plates. Replace stained or damaged wall plates or devices.

B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 218 of 315


26 28 16 – 1

SECTION 26 28 16

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Safety switches.

B. Fuses.







A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA FU 1 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

NEMA KS 1 Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution

Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum)

NEMA WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices



C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

UL 248 Low-Voltage Fuses


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 219 of 315


26 28 16 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Not Used.



B. Provide safety switches that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized

Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the


C. Comply with the following standards as applicable:

1. NEMA KS 1.

2. UL 50.

3. NEMA FU 1.

4. UL 248.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store safety switches, enclosed circuit breakers, and

fuses according to the manufacturer’s written instructions.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide one spray can of touch-up paint that matches finish of switches.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted; follow the guidelines set forth in the


2.2 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Provide NRTL-listed, NEMA Type 1, 3R, 3R/12 or 4 Heavy Duty safety switches

with ratings and number of poles as indicated on the Drawings or as required by

the NEC suitable for the environment into which it is being installed.

B. Each safety switch shall have an equipment ground bar.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 220 of 315


26 28 16 – 3

C. Each safety switch shall have provisions for padlocking in the OFF position.

D. Manufacturer: Square D “Class 3110” or Cutler Hammer “DH” Series.

2.3 FUSES

A. Provide NEMA FU 1 and UL 248 fuses with type, voltage, and current ratings as

indicated on drawings.

B. Manufacturer: Cooper/Bussmann or Mersen/Ferraz Shawmut.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install safety switches and fuses where indicated on the Drawings, according to

manufacturer’s instructions, and the NEC.

B. Ground and bond safety switches as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and


C. Install conduits as required in Section 26 05 33, “Raceways and Boxes for


D. Install conductors as required in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables.”

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals to the manufacturer’s

published torque-tightening values.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify safety switches and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as


B. Mark floor in front of safety switches to show NEC required working space

according to Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”


A. Clean interior and exterior of safety switches.

B. Verify that ratings of fuses and safety switches match values indicated on the

Drawings.

C. Verify proper torque of accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after

installing safety switches, document in work package or fabrication document.

After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 221 of 315


26 28 16 – 4


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 222 of 315


26 51 00 – 1

SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Interior luminaires and accessories.







A. International Code Council

IBC International Building Code (IBC)

B. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)/Illuminating Engineering

Society of North America (IESNA)

NECA/IESNA 500 Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor

Commercial Lighting Systems (ANSI)

NECA/IESNA 502 Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial

Lighting Systems (ANSI)



1.3 SUBMITTALS



Not Used.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 223 of 315


26 51 00 – 2


A. Comply with the NEC and the IBC for components and installation.

B. Provide luminaires listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing



C. Use manufacturers that are experienced in manufacturing luminaires, lamps and

ballasts similar to those indicated for this Project and have a record of successful

in-service performance.

D. Coordinate luminaires, mounting hardware and trim with the ceiling system.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Luminaire: A luminaire is a complete lighting unit and parts required to distribute

the light, and connection of the lighting unit to the power supply.

1. Average Life: The time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50

percent will have survived under specified operating and starting

condition.

2. Total harmonic distortion (THD): The root mean square (RMS) of all the

harmonic components divided by the fundamental current.


A. Luminaires, shall perform satisfactorily in the following service conditions:

1. Ambient temperature limits: 32 to 104°F unless indicated otherwise for

specific products in Part 2.


A. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to the following NECA

National Electrical Installation Standards:

1. NECA/IESNA 500.

2. NECA/IESNA 502.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Refer to the Contract Statement of Work.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 224 of 315


26 51 00 – 3

2.2 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish interior luminaires that comply with requirements specified below,

indicated on the Drawings, and as required to meet conditions of installation.

B. Metal parts shall be free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C. Metal components shall be formed and supported to prevent sagging and warping.

D. Steel parts shall be finished with manufacturer’s standard finish applied over a

corrosion-resistant primer. Finish shall be free from runs, streaks, stains or

defects.

E. Doors and frames shall be smooth operating and free from light leakage under

operating conditions.

2.3 LUMINAIRE ACCESSORIES

A. Provide supports, mounting brackets, frames, and other accessories required for

luminaire installation.

B. Furnish hangers as specified below and as required by conditions of installation:

1. Stem hangers shall be made of steel tubing with swivel ball hanger fitting

and ceiling canopy. Finish the same as the luminaire.

2. Rod hangers shall be made of 1/4-in. threaded zinc-plated steel rod.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install interior lighting system in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer’s

installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the Project site.

C. Mounting heights specified or indicated on the Drawings are to the bottom of the

luminaire for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to the center of the luminaire for wall-

mounted fixtures.


A. Make electrical connections, clean interiors and exteriors of luminaires, install

lamps, energize and test luminaires, inspect interior lighting system, and deliver

spare parts in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 225 of 315


26 56 00 – 1

SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Exterior luminaires and accessories.

B. Grounding.

C. Conduit and wiring.

D. Lighting controls.

E. Wood lighting poles








ANSI 05.1 Wood Pole – Specifications and Dimensions

B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other

Structures


ASTM A123/A123M Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip

Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

D. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA)

AWPA C7 Western red cedar, northern white cedar and Alaska

yellow cedar poles – preservative treatment of

incised pole butts by the thermal process (no s/s

document

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 226 of 315


26 56 00 – 2

AWPA P Standard for field cuts, creosote for brush or spray

treatment

E. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

Lighting Handbook

F. International Code Council

International Building Code

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 1598 Luminaires

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Approval Not Required.

Not Used.


A. Comply with the following codes and standards:

1. NEC for components and installation.

2. International Building Code.

3. ASCE-7.

B. Provide luminaires listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing



C. Use manufacturers that are experienced in manufacturing, luminaires, lamps,

similar to those indicated for this Project and have a record of successful in-

service performance.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 227 of 315


26 56 00 – 3


A. International Building Code and ASCE 7 design wind conditions:

1. Exposure Category: C

2. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (3-second gust at 33-ft above ground, mean

recurrence interval of 50 years)

3. Importance Factor: 1.15

B. Ambient temperatures, °C (°F)

1. -25°F to 115°F

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, terms used in this Section are as defined

in the NEC or the IESNA Lighting Handbook.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products according to the manufacturer’s

written instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 FINISHES

A. Furnish luminaires and accessories with finishes as scheduled that are resistant to

fading, chalking, and other changes due to aging and exposure to heat and

ultraviolet light. Acceptable finishes for metals are:

1. Hot-dipped galvanized steel: ASTM A123/A123M.

2. Brushed natural aluminum.

3. Anodized aluminum: AAMA 611, Class I.

4. Powder coated aluminum: Fluorocarbon polymer powder coating per

AAMA 2605, over chrome phosphate conversion coated aluminum.

5. Powder coated steel: Fluorocarbon polymer powder coating per

AAMA 2605 over zinc phosphate conversion coated shot-blasted steel.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 228 of 315


26 56 00 – 4

B. Reject luminaires and accessories with finish having runs, streaks, stains, and

defects.

C. Replace luminaires and accessories showing evidence of yellowing, fading,

chalking, and other changes indicating failure during warranty period.

D. Use stainless steel for exposed hardware.

2.3 WOOD POLES

A. Wood Poles: ANSI 05.1, western red cedar, or Douglas fir cut from live timber.

Pole shall be butt-treated by manufacture in accordance with AWPA C7, using

AWPA P preservatives. Each pole shall be given single top cut at 30 degree angle

with normal to axis of pole and at right angle to sweep. Gains shall be cut so roof

will be at right angles to the line and sweep of the pole will be in line. Roofs and

gains shall be brush treated by manufacture with specified preservative. Each

gain shall fit crossarm tightly. Bolt holes shall not be more than 1/16 in. oversize.

2.4 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES – GENERAL

A. Furnish exterior luminaires that comply with requirements specified on the

Drawings.

B. Luminaires shall be NRTL-listed as conforming to UL 1598.

C. Luminaire photometric characteristics shall be based on IESNA-approved

methods for photometric measurements performed by a recognized photometric

laboratory.

D. Luminaire housing shall be primarily metal.

1. Metal parts shall be free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be fabricated from corrosion-resistant

aluminum, formed and supported to prevent sagging and warping.

3. Exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel.

E. Provide lenses, fabricated from materials that are UV stabilized to be resistant to

yellowing and other changes due to aging or exposure to heat and ultraviolet

radiation.

F. Doors shall have resilient gaskets that are heat-resistant and aging-resistant to seal

and cushion lens and refractor.

2.5 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish photoelectric relays or timers to control exterior lighting as indicated on

the Drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 229 of 315


26 56 00 – 5

B. Furnish a “HAND-OFF-AUTO” control switch and enclosure to facilitate testing

of the lighting system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, spaces, and surfaces to receive exterior luminaires and poles for

compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of the product. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved

drawings.

B. Locations of luminaires and poles shown on the Drawings are diagrammatic.

Coordinate luminaire locations with building finishes and building structure.

Obtain approval for location changes through TOC Construction Representative.

C. Set luminaires plumb, square, level and secure.

D. Install surface mounted luminaires directly to exterior wall, building structural

steel, or an outlet box which is supported from structure.

E. Install luminaires in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding for exterior lighting using materials and methods specified in

Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

3.4 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Install exterior lighting control system components in accordance with the

manufacturers’ instructions. Have installation instructions available at the

construction site.

B. Install a HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch in the control system to allow for

testing of luminaires.

C. Provide separate control of exterior lighting system as follows:

1. Safety, security, and pedestrian walkway: “ON” at dusk, “OFF” at dawn.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 230 of 315


26 56 00 – 6

3.5 RACEWAYS AND BOXES

A. Install conduit system for exterior lighting using materials and methods specified

in Section 26 05 33, “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.”

3.6 BUILDING WIRE

A. Install wiring for exterior lighting using materials and methods specified in

Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”


A. Inspect each installed lighting unit for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and

components.

B. Verify proper voltage at equipment served.

C. Test installed luminaires for proper operation.

1. Provide instruments to make and record test results.

2. Replace or repair malfunctioning luminaires and components then re-test.

3. Repeat procedure until all luminaires operate properly.

D. Replace inoperative luminaires.

3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean each luminaire inside and out, including plastics and glassware. Use

methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Aim adjustable luminaires to provide required light intensities as indicated on the

Drawings or as directed by the TOC Construction Representative.

C. Adjust exterior lighting controls to obtain the following performance unless

otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed by the TOC Construction

Representative:

1. “ON” at sunset “OFF” sunrise.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 231 of 315


31 23 00 – 1

SECTION 31 23 00

EXCAVATION AND FILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Section Includes:

1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade pavements.

2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.

3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.







A. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM D653 Standard Terminology Relating to Soil, Rock, and

Contained Fluids

ASTM D1557 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

ASTM D2922 Test Methods for Density of Soil and

Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods

(Shallow Depth)

ASTM D4491 Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles

by Permittivity

ASTM D4632 Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and

Elongation of Geotextiles

ASTM D6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and

Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 232 of 315


31 23 00 – 2


29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction



TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 Implementation of DOE-0344, Excavating,

Trenching, and Shoring

D. Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT)

WSDOT M41-10 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and

Municipal Construction, Section 9-03.9, Aggregates

for Ballast and Crushed Surfacing

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including

haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench

before laying pipe.

C. Borrow Material: Material from required excavations or from designated borrow

areas on or near site.

D. Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for next layer or next phase of

Work.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also

minimized upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

G. Lift: Loose (un-compacted) layer of material.

H. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of required

demolition, clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil,

excavation to grade, and subgrade preparation.

I. Selected backfill material: Materials available on-site that WRPS Construction

Engineer determines to be suitable for specific use.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 233 of 315


31 23 00 – 3

J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, curbs, or other

man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

K. Structural Fill: Fill materials as required under structures, pavements, and other

facilities.

L. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as

underground services within buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Qualifications for Soils Technician (field inspector).

2. Shoring Plan (if required): Design of shoring shall be sealed by a

professional engineer registered in the State of Washington.


1. Competent person: Before excavation and in writing, submit identity of

individual designated Competent Person as defined in 29 CFR 1926.650

and as required by the approved safety and health program.


A. Provide survey control to avoid unauthorized over-excavation.

B. Deliverable Documentation: The following documents and records, required by

this Section, shall be delivered to Construction Document Control.

Document Paragraph

Backfill Permit 1.6.A

Excavation Permit 1.6.B

In-Place Density Tests 3.13.C

Soil Compaction Test Report 3.12.C

Utility Location Marker Verification 3.12.D

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 234 of 315


31 23 00 – 4

1.6 PERMITS


B. Deleted.

1. Deleted.

2. Deleted.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Do not place backfill or fill on frozen ground.

B. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill

until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction.

C. Do not place backfill or fill on frozen ground.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use materials free of frozen particles, lumps, organic matter, and trash for backfill

and fill, bedding, and stabilization.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM

according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or

gravel larger than 3 in. in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials,

vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH,

OH, and PT according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within

two percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Base Course: Top course conforming to WSDOT M41-10, Section 9-03.9(3),

Crushed Surfacing Base Course.

E. Backfill and Fill: Obtain from excavation or locations designated by the

Company.

1. Backfill within the Tank Farm using excavation (in-situ) material or 5/8

minus crushed rock.

2. Use of any other imported material will require TOC Construction

Representative’s approval.

3. Controlled Density Fill (CDF): See Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 235 of 315


31 23 00 – 5

F. Bedding for Underground Piping, Tubing, Conduit, and Utility Lines: Sand as

defined in ASTM D653 or excavated sandy material having less than 20% gravel

particles. Gravel particles shall have a maximum dimension of 1/2 in.

G. Location Marker: 3-in. wide, detectable plastic tape imprinted with warning such

as “CAUTION – BURIED INSTALLATION BELOW” at maximum 4-ft

intervals. “Terra Tape Sentry Line 620” with “Terra Clips,” both by Reef

Industries, or approved substitute.

H. Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene, non-woven geotextile with grab tensile

strength (ASTM D4632) of 90 lb/ft and water flow rate (ASTM D4491) of

150 gallons per minute per square foot. US Fabric Type US 90NW or similar.

I. Slope Stabilization: Ballast in accordance with WSDOT M 41-10, Section

9-03.9(1) or 9-03.9(2).

J. General Stabilization: Crushed rock with maximum fragment size of 3/4 in.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities sidewalks, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by

earth moving.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving

operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperature and frost.

Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation work shall comply with TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30.

B. Excavation shall be defined to mean any hand digging or machine digging below

original grade. These requirements constitute the need for an “Excavation

Permit” (Form A-7400-373). If an excavation permit is not required, this section

does not apply.

C. Notify TOC Construction Representative before excavation.

D. Locate and expose underground utilities using subsurface scanning and hand

tools, or other methods if approved by the TOC Construction Representative.

E. If cultural properties (e.g., bones and artifacts) are encountered, stop excavation

and notify the Company. Obtain approval before resuming excavation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 236 of 315


31 23 00 – 6

F. If unexpected debris is encountered, stop excavation and notify the TOC

Construction Representative. Obtain approval before resuming excavation.

G. Excavation of contaminated soil will be administered in accordance with

contractor procedures and programs.

H. Excavate earth and establish protective systems in accordance with the approved

safety and health program.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or

minus 2 in. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures

for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other

construction, and for inspections. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be

deposited against earth.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Minimize disturbance to

bottom of excavation. Some over-excavation will likely be needed.

Excavation shall be trimmed out with crushed rock fill and compacted

before placing foundations.

2. Make excavation bottom compact, level, true and free of loose material.

Correct over-excavation by extending concrete down to undisturbed earth

at time of concrete placement or by placing and compacting structural

backfill and fill.

B. In-Situ Soils

1. If not contaminated, salvage excavated soil for use as backfill and fill

material.

2. Using nuclear density gauge, conduct in-place density tests or use existing

testing laboratory reports (proctors) if backfill and compaction is to be

completed via approved control procedure. Record results for use as

standard density during backfill compaction. (See Paragraph 3.12.)

3. Dispose of contaminated and excess soil in accordance with Construction

Waste Management Plan.

4. If stabilization is required because of excavation, finish subgrade 3 in.

below elevations shown on Drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 237 of 315


31 23 00 – 7

3.4 CONTOURS AND ELEVATIONS

A. Excavation for Hose-in-Hose Transfer Line (HIHTL):

1. Excavate deep enough to allow laying HIHTL at line and grade shown on

Drawings. Two inches of compacted bedding is required under HIHTL.

Correct over-excavation by placing and compacting backfill and fill. Pare

holes in trench bottoms for pipe couplings so pipe will bear full length of

pipe barrel or pipe section.

2. The TOC Construction Representative or designee must review the trench

for compliance with design requirements prior to backfilling.

B. Excavation for Conduit Trenches: Excavate to contours and elevations shown on

Drawings.

C. Excavation for Common Earthwork: Excavate as needed for general purpose, or

as shown on Drawings.

D. Trench bottoms. Excavate and shape trench bottoms to be uniform and even.

Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. Allow for

pipe or conduit bedding as indicated.

1. Excavate trenches for HIHTL installation 2-in. deeper than elevation

required to allow for bedding course. Over excavation for conduit

bedding is not required if soil is free of projecting stones and sharp

objects.

E. In-Situ Soils

1. Salvage excavated soil for use as backfill and fill material.

2. Using nuclear density gauge, conduct in-place density tests or use existing

testing laboratory reports (proctors) if backfill and compaction is to be

completed via approved control procedure. Record results for use as

standard density during backfill compaction. (See Paragraph 3.7.)

3. Dispose of contaminated and excess soil in accordance with Construction

Waste Management Plan.

4. If stabilization is required because of excavation, finish subgrade 3-in.

below elevations shown on Drawings.

F. Shoring

1. If conditions require shoring, a Shoring Plan shall be submitted to WRPS

for approval. Reference TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 for responsibilities and

implementation requirements.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 238 of 315


31 23 00 – 8

2. Design of shoring shall be in accordance with TFC-ENG-STD-06,

Section 3.7.

3.5 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slab and pavements to identify soft

pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll when subgrade is wet or

saturated.

B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain,

accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by WRPS Construction

Engineer.

C. Test or inspect subgrade materials as required for compaction requirements as

applicable.

3.6 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile excavated material that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until

material is needed.

B. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated soil materials without intermixing.

Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water.

C. Do not stockpile excavated soil materials adjacent to trenches and other

excavations, unless excavation side slopes and excavation support systems are

designed, constructed, and maintained for stockpile loads.

D. Do not stockpile excavated materials near or over existing facilities, adjacent

property, if weight of stockpiled material could induce excessive settlement.

3.7 BACKFILL AND FILL PREPARATION

A. Remove debris and organic material from area to be backfilled or filled.

B. Do not backfill by sluicing or flooding unless written approval is obtained from

TOC Construction Representative.

C. Allow concrete to cure before placing backfill against concrete.

D. Keep placement surfaces free of water, debris, and foreign material during

placement and compaction of fill and backfill materials.

E. Do not place fill or backfill, if fill or backfill material is frozen or if surface upon

which fill or backfill is to be placed is frozen.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 239 of 315


31 23 00 – 9

3.8 BACKFILL AND FILL

A. Perform backfilling and filling in accordance with an approved soil/gravel

compaction procedure (for example Attachment 2 or Attachment 3).

B. Place specified common or native backfill in even, loose layers not more than

8-in. deep if using Attachment 2, or not more than 6-in. deep if using

Attachment 3, in a manner that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to

specified densities prior to placing succeeding lifts. Slope lifts only where

necessary to conform to final grades or as necessary to keep placement surfaces

drained of water.

C. Perform initial backfilling and filling in presence of TOC Construction

Representative/Engineering Representative.

D. Obtain test results (as applicable) and adjust compaction method, if required.

E. Obtain TOC Construction Representative approval before proceeding with

backfilling and filling.

3.9 CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL

A. The Controlled Density Fill (CDF) shall be placed in a uniform manner that will

prevent voids or segregation of the bedding and filling materials. If required, the

CDF shall be consolidated with internal vibrators.

B. The CDF shall not be subjected to load and shall remain undisturbed by

construction activities for a minimum of 24 hours after placement.

3.10 BACKFILL AND FILL – FOUNDATIONS AND SLABS

A. Under Structures: Within influence area beneath structures, slabs, curbs, backfill

with structural fill, unless otherwise indicated by design. A minimum of 6 in. of

granular fill is required immediately below concrete footings, slabs and other

concrete structures.

B. Place loose layers of specified structural backfill and fill evenly up sides of wall

to avoid unbalanced loading. Limit each layer that is 24-in. below finish grade to

8-in. depth. Limit each layer in top 24 in. to 4-in. depth.

C. Compact each layer uniformly to 95% of maximum density as determined by

specified compaction tests in Paragraph 3.12.

3.11 FINISH GRADING AND STABILIZATION

A. Grade each area disturbed by work to blend into existing contours. Slope area to

drain away from structures. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to

cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 240 of 315


31 23 00 – 10

B. Rake each area to remove surface cobbles larger than 6 in. Dispose of excess

material and debris as directed by the Company.

C. Stabilize area with minimum of 1-in. and maximum of a 3-in. course of specified

stabilization material.

D. After finish grading and stabilization, remove surface markers and flags.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified geotechnical/soils

engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill lift.

Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously

complete work comply with requirements.

C. Compaction Testing (not required if using Attachment 2, “Procedure for Backfill

and Compaction of Existing Soils within Tank Farms” or Attachment 3,

“Procedure for Backfill and Compaction of 5/8 Minus Crushed Rock”)

1. Test compacted backfill and fill at the following intervals.

a. Backfill and fill: one test of each layer, each layer shall not exceed

8 in.

2. Perform compaction testing in accordance with the following standards.

Provide report required by each standard.

a. Compaction control: ASTM D1557.

i. In-place density: ASTM D6938. Each layer shall be as

dense as the existing soil density (Paragraph 3.1.H.2) and

compacted uniformly to 95% of maximum density as

established by compaction tests (per ASTM D1557).

ii. Prior to completion of backfill, perform random

surveillance to verify buried utility marker tape has been

installed and record results.

D. Buried Pipe and Utility Location Marker Verification

1. Prior to completion of backfill, perform random surveillance to verify

buried utility marker tape has been installed and record results.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 241 of 315


31 23 00 – Att. 1–1


BACKFILL PERMIT FORM

Key to Backfill Permit Form

Item # Description

1 Permit No. – Sequential number, developed by the Project; i.e., “5-0001.”

2 Self-explanatory.

3 Project title.

4 Example – “22337 Release 5.”

5 Describe location of the backfill; i.e. “Conduit run 001, between

Handhole-005 and Handhole-006.”

6 Enter the applicable drawings that show the backfill location.

7 Enter any other reference documents.

8 Discipline Foreman signature, signifying that their work in the excavation to

be backfilled is complete. “N/A” will be entered if given discipline is not

applicable to the specified backfill area.

9 Quality Signature, signifying that all the quality requirements for the backfill

area have been met prior to backfill and backfill may commence.

10 Field Work Supervisor signature, signifying that the all contract requirements

for the backfill area have been met and backfill may commence.

11 Enter backfill requirements, typically construction specification reference.

12 “Construction Representative,” this signature would be from the Construction

Group, signifying that they agree that all of the requirements for the backfill

area have been met and permission to proceed with backfill is granted.

13 Date that “Construction Representative” signed off the form.

14 Date that the applicable discipline foreman, Quality and Field Work

Supervisor signed the form.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 242 of 315

RP

P-S

PE

C-6

0023

, R

ev. 4

31 2

3 0

0 –

Att

. 1

–2

BA

CK

FIL

L P

ER

MIT

(1

) N

o.:

(2)

Pro

ject o

r W

ork

Packa

ge

No.:

(3

) T

itle

: (4

) C

on

tra

ct

No.:

(5)

Descri

ptio

n o

f B

ackfill

Work

A

pp

rova

ls

(14

) D

ate

(8

) E

lectr

ica

l

(8)

Pip

ing

(8)

Carp

en

try

(6)

Dra

win

gs:

(8)

Concre

te

(8)

La

yo

ut

(8)

Oth

er

(7)

Refe

ren

ce

(8)

Oth

er

(9)

Qu

alit

y

(10

) F

WS

(11

) B

ackfill

Re

quir

em

en

ts

Au

tho

riza

tio

n to

Pro

ce

ed

by

(12

) W

RP

S C

onstr

uctio

n R

epre

se

nta

tive

(1

3)

Date

EN

D O

F A

TT

AC

HM

EN

T 1

RP

P-S

PE

C-6

0023 R

ev.0

43/3

0/2

017 -

8:1

4 A

M243 o

f 315


31 23 00 – Att. 2-1


PROCEDURE FOR BACKFILL AND COMPACTION OF

EXISTING SOILS WITHIN TANK FARMS

PURPOSE

This procedure identifies a process for placement and compaction of soil backfill by a controlled

method. This procedure also defines the degree of compactive effort required to produce

acceptable in-place densities as an alternative to performing density tests with a nuclear density

gauge.

SCOPE

This procedure defines the requirements for placement and compaction of soil backfill including

inspection methods to verify the acceptability of the compacted backfill within Tank Farm areas

defined on project drawings. The compaction details in this were taken from Fluor Federal

Services Job Bulletin No. JB-RPP-041, Rev. 1, which has been accepted standard practice in the

Tank Farms.

In-place testing of compacted backfill including sand bedding by use of the nuclear density

gauge is not required for this procedure. Random periodic visual observation and monitoring of

the backfill operation and compactive effort shall be the basis for acceptance.

PROCEDURE

Compaction of backfill within the Tank Farms shall be controlled by adherence to this procedure

and defined compactive effort within established variables as defined below. Determination of

maximum standard density, from testing laboratory reports (proctors) or in situ values obtained

from nuclear gauge testing of undisturbed ground is not covered by this procedure.

Only materials as defined by the project specifications will be used for backfill. Keep materials

free of frozen particles, lumps, organic matter, and debris. Ensure that the area to be backfilled

is not frozen and the backfill material does not contain frozen material.

If sand is encountered during excavation perform the following for installation and compaction.

A. Excavate to proper installation depth. Use trench box if necessary.

B. Install pipe on stone free earth. Rake native soil or sand bed if required.

C. Cover pipe with 6” of 5/8” minus top course material.

Backfilling by means of sluicing or flooding with water is not permitted.

Backfill material shall be placed in loose uniform lifts not to exceed 8 in. in depth.

If needed, water shall be added and mixed with the backfill material before it is compacted to

achieve optimum moisture content.

Optimum moisture content shall be approximately 8.5% and may vary as much as plus or minus

2.5% depending on different soil types and gradations. The addition of water to cohesive soil

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 244 of 315


31 23 00 – Att. 2-2

types shall be such that the material is easily compactable by mechanical manipulation as defined

in this procedure.

Backfill shall be brought up in layers. Each layer shall be compacted full width and length by

use of either pneumatic or gas powered compaction equipment such as a Wacker®32,

model

BS-600 manufactured by Wacker Corporation or equivalent. Alternatively, a pneumatic “Pogo

Stick” such as that manufactured by Jet Equipment or equivalent may be used. The use of “Pogo

Stick” compaction equipment shall be limited to use in small confined areas such as that found in

and around pipes and conduits and small excavations. Alternative compaction equipment may

be used if acceptable to the TOC Construction Representative. All equipment used shall be in

good working order capable of performing to manufacturer’s standards.

The compactive effort for each layer of backfill shall be as follows:

· If a Wacker or equivalent is used, a minimum of three complete passes shall be made.

· If a “Pogo Stick” type device is used, a minimum of eight complete passes is made.

One complete pass shall be defined as full rotation over the area being compacted. As a

minimum, a rotation shall be once over and once back across the area being compacted. The rate

of equipment travel shall be approximately 15 lineal feet per minute.

Water shall be added as necessary between individual passes to maintain the moisture content

within the optimum range.

Bring up backfill material evenly on each side of walls, structures, and pipeline in order to avoid

damaging or displacing them by unbalanced loading. Obtain written approval from the Tank

Operations Contractor, Washington River Protections Solutions, LLC, for variations from this

process that may result in uneven load distribution.

If backfill material is to be placed against or on top of newly poured concrete, ensure that the

concrete curing period has been achieved and concrete design strength achieved as required by

ACI 301. Backfill material shall not be placed against foundation walls before the curing period

is completed, unless written approval from the design engineer is obtained on the Backfill

Permit.

INSPECTION

Control of backfill placement, optimum moisture content, and compactive effort shall be

accomplished by visual surveillance. Surveillances shall be performed by a trained and qualified

soils technician.

Personnel performing oversight and surveillance of the backfill operations shall possess a

thorough working knowledge of earthwork and soils relative to material types and classification,

excavation methods and procedures, material gradation, fill and backfill operations, compaction

equipment and methods and moisture control. Oversight personnel shall have received training

to perform visual surveillances of backfill operations.

32

Wacker is a registered trademark of Wacker Neuson Production Americas, LLC, Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 245 of 315


31 23 00 – Att. 2-3

Verification that soil moisture content is within the specified range shall be accomplished by

visual and physical examination of the wetted material. Cohesive soil containing the correct

optimum moisture content shall exhibit no evidence of saturation yet shall have enough moisture

to maintain shape when deformed. Physical examination of soil cohesion and plasticity shall be

the basis for determining proper moisture content.

The oversight person shall visually observe the backfill and compaction operation to verify

adherence to this procedure. Type of compaction equipment, use of equipment, depth of lifts,

number of passes and rate of travel shall be observed. Surveillances shall be documented on

surveillance reports.

The frequency of surveillances for backfill operations shall as a minimum be at the beginning of

backfilling for a project or job and at least daily thereafter while work is in progress.

END OF ATTACHMENT 2

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 246 of 315


31 23 00 – Att. 3-1


PROCEDURE FOR BACKFILL AND COMPACTION

OF 5/8 MINUS CRUSHED ROCK

PURPOSE

This procedure identifies a process for placement and compaction of 5/8 minus crushed rock

backfill by a controlled method. This procedure also defines the degree of compactive effort

required to produce acceptable in-place densities as an alternative to performing density tests

with a nuclear density gauge.

SCOPE

This procedure defines the requirements for placement and compaction of 5/8 minus crushed

rock backfill including inspection methods to verify the acceptability of the compacted backfill

within Tank Farm areas defined on project drawings. The compaction details in this were taken

from American Electric test plan 54891-006-TP-001.

In-place testing of compacted backfill by use of the nuclear density gauge is not required for this

procedure. Random periodic visual observation and monitoring of the backfill operation and

compactive effort shall be the basis for acceptance.

PROCEDURE

Compaction of 5/8 minus crushed rock backfill shall be controlled by adherence to this

procedure and defined compactive effort within established variables as defined below.

Keep materials free of frozen particles, lumps, organic matter, and debris. Ensure that the area to

be backfilled is not frozen and the backfill material does not contain frozen material.

Backfilling by means of sluicing or flooding with water is not permitted.

Backfill material shall be placed in loose uniform lifts not to exceed 6 in. in depth.

If needed, water shall be added and mixed with the backfill material before it is compacted to

achieve optimum moisture content.

Optimum moisture content shall be approximately 9.5 percent and may vary as much as plus or

minus 1.5 percent. The addition of water shall be such that the material is easily compactable by

mechanical manipulation as defined in this procedure.

Backfill shall be brought up in layers. Each layer shall be compacted full width and length by

use of a Wacker, model BS 50-2 or model WP 1550 AW manufactured by Wacker Corporation

or equivalent. All equipment used shall be in good working order capable of performing to

manufacturer’s standards.

The compactive effort for each layer of backfill shall be as follows:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 247 of 315


31 23 00 – Att. 3-2

If a Wacker BS 50-2 or equivalent is used, a minimum of 4 complete passes shall be made.

If a Wacker WP 1550 or equivalent is used, a minimum of 2 complete passes shall be made.

One complete pass shall be defined as full rotation over the area being compacted. As a

minimum, a rotation shall be once over and once back across the area being compacted. The rate

of equipment travel shall be approximately 15 lineal feet per minute.

Water shall be added as necessary between individual passes to maintain the moisture content

within the optimum range.

Bring up backfill material evenly on each side of walls, structures, and pipeline in order to avoid

damaging or displacing them by unbalanced loading. Obtain written approval from the TOC

Construction Representative for variations from this process that may result in uneven load

distribution.

If backfill material is to be placed against or on top of newly poured concrete, ensure that the

concrete curing period has been achieved and concrete design strength achieved as required by

ACI 301. Backfill material shall not be placed against foundation walls before the curing period

is completed, unless written approval from the design engineer is obtained on the Backfill

Permit.

INSPECTION

Control of backfill placement, optimum moisture content and compactive effort shall be

accomplished by visual surveillance. Surveillances shall be performed by a trained and qualified

soils technician.

Personnel performing oversight and surveillance of the backfill operations shall possess a

thorough working knowledge of earthwork and soils relative to material types and classification,

excavation methods and procedures, material gradation, fill and backfill operations, compaction

equipment and methods, and moisture control. Oversight personnel shall have received training

to perform visual surveillances of backfill operations.

Verification that soil moisture content is within the specified range shall be accomplished by

visual and physical examination of the wetted material.

The oversight person shall visually observe the backfill and compaction operation to verify

adherence to this procedure. Type of compaction equipment, use of equipment, depth of lifts,

number of passes, and rate of travel shall be observed. Surveillances shall be documented on

surveillance reports.

The frequency of surveillances for backfill operations shall as a minimum be at the beginning of

backfilling for a project or job and at least daily thereafter while work is in progress.

END OF ATTACHMENT 3

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 248 of 315


33 10 00 – 1

SECTION 33 10 00

WATER UTILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of below grade piping from the raw

water main line to the backflow preventer in the Air and Water Service Building

and of sewer piping to tie into the existing chemical drain line.




The following documents and others referenced therein form part of Contract to the




ASME B16.11 Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 through

NPS 24 Metric/ Inch Standard

ASME B31.9, 2014 Building Services Piping

ASME B40.1 Gauges: Pressure Indicating Dial Type — Elastic

Element


Section VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels



Brazing Operations




RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 249 of 315


33 10 00 – 2

C. American Society of Safety Engineers®33

(ASSE®33

)

ASSE 1013 Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers

and Reduced Pressure Principle Fire Protection

Backflow Preventers



Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless

Steel Bolting


Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure

ASTM A865 Standard Specification for Threaded Couplings,

Steel, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded

or Seamless, for use in Steel Pipe Joints

ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM A234 Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of

Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate

and High Temperature Service

ASTM C547 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe

Insulation

ASTM C552 Specifications for Cellular Glass Block and Pipe

Thermal Insulation

ASTM D2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of

Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity

Flow Applications

ASTM D2661 Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-

Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste,

and Vent Pipe and Fittings

33

ASSE is a registered trademark of American Society of Safety Engineers, Des Plaines, Illinois.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 250 of 315


33 10 00 – 3

E. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

AWWA C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and

Fitting for Water

AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. Through

48 in., for Water and Other Liquids

AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe

and Fittings

AWWA C151 American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe,

Centrifugally Cast, for Water

AWWA C153 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service

AWWA C223 Fabricated Steel and Stainless Steel Tapping

Sleeves

AWWA C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water-Supply

Service

AWWA C511 Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention

Assembly

AWWA C600 Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Water

Mains and Their Appurtenances

AWWA C800 Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings

AWWA M14 Recommended Practice for Backflow Prevention

and Cross-Connection Control

F. AWWA Pacific Northwest Section

Cross-Connection Control Manual Accepted

Procedures and Practices

G. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)

UPC Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC)

H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 24 Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service

Mains and Their Appurtenances

I. University of Southern California Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and

Hydraulic Research

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 251 of 315


33 10 00 – 4

Manual of Cross-Connection Control

J. Washington Administrative Code (WAC)

WAC 246-290 Cross Connection Control

K. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)



L. American Welding Society (AWS)


1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Gauges: After testing submit for approval vendor information showing

that gauges used in testing are calibrated and capable of measuring at least

1.5 times test pressure, but no more than 4 times test pressure.

2. Flushing: After testing submit for approval verification showing that the

flushing operations were performed for a sufficient time to ensure

thorough cleaning.

3. Mainline: After testing submit for approval verification showing that the

mainline is capable of sustaining a 200 psi load for 2 hours or at 50 psi in

excess of the maximum static pressure. Measure leakage in accordance

with NFPA 24, Article 8.9 for underground piping.

4. Welding Procedure Specifications and or Standard Welding Procedure

Specifications: Five days before first use or start of fabrication, submit

each in accordance with Paragraph 1.4.B.

5. Welding Personnel Qualifications: Five days before start of fabrication,



documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A.4 for

information/record.

7. Weld Examinations as required by Paragraph 3.4.A.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 252 of 315


33 10 00 – 5


1. Filter Vendor information: Submit two copies: Dimensional drawings;

Specifications; Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions;

Spare Parts List.




B. Qualifications

1. Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground and

Underground Piping in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.B.3.

2. Qualification of Inspectors: A certified independent testing agency shall

perform all required inspections and testing.

3. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding

Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification (current or previous

certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.

4. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be

certified in accordance with approved procedure, which shall meet the

requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to

interpret results.

5. Examination Procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance

with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures

at the jobsite.

6. Pressure Testing Procedures: Pressure testing procedures shall be in

accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of

procedures at jobsite.

1.5 PERMITS




PART 2 PRODUCTS



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 253 of 315


33 10 00 – 6

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Sewer Pipe and Fittings: Materials shall be ABS plastic sewer pipe conforming to

the requirements of ASTM D2661.

B. Raw Water Pipe and Fittings Below Grade

1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, Class 150.

a. Joints: Push-on joints, AWWA C111 rubber gaskets.

b. Fittings: AWWA C110, Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron, Class 250 or

AWWA C153, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, Class 250 or

XTRA FLEX®34

restrained joint high-deflection fittings.

c. Pipe and Fittings: Cement-mortar lining in accordance with

AWWA C104.

2. Galvanized Steel Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A53, type E or S, galvanized,

standard weight, Schedule 40.

a. Joints: Threaded.

b. Fittings: ASTM A865, threaded and galvanized

C. Valves

1. Gate Valves over 2 in.: AWWA C509, Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

listed or FM approved, Class 250, non-rising stem, open left, mechanical

joint inlet and outlet with mechanical joint unassembled accessories or

Mueller AquaGrip®35

System.

D. Tapping Sleeve: AWWA C223, fabricated steel, suitable for PVC, steel, ductile

iron, and cast iron pipe, outlet flange size and sleeve O.D. to suit piping system.

E. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron with top section and cover with lettering “WATER”

stamped on the cover, bottom section with base of size to fit over valve, barrel

approximately 5 in. in diameter, adjustable cast-iron extension of length required.

F. Gaskets: Gaskets containing asbestos are not permitted.

G. Tracer Wire: #10 AWG THHN/THWN, yellow, solid copper.

34

XTRA FLEX is a registered trademark of United States Pipe and Foundry Company, LLC, Birmingham,

Alabama. 35

AquaGrip is a trademark of Mueller International, LLC, Atlanta, Georgia.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 254 of 315


33 10 00 – 7

H. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings

1. Copper Tubing: AWWA C800.

2. Dielectric: Watts Series 3003.

3. Mechanical or Push-On Type Pipe, and Fittings Below Grade.

a. UL listed or FM approved.

b. Megalug®36

malleable iron retainer/restraint gland with epoxy or

bituminous outside coating and 1/2-in. minimum diameter asphalt

coated tie rods.

c. For PVC, use a compression connection and restraint system,

Mueller AquaGrip System.

I. Raw Water Pipe and Fittings from the Inlet to the Backflow Preventor

36

Megalug is a trademark of EBAA Iron Inc., Eastland, Texas.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 255 of 315


33 10 00 – 8

Service Design Pressure

(psig)

Hydrostatic Test

Pressure (psig)

Design Temp

(°F)

Inlet to Backflow Preventor 150 225 +10/-0 140

Sizes 3/4 in. & smaller 1 in. & larger

Pipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP304L, seamless

Wall Thickness Schedule 80S. Schedule 40S.

Fittings Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L,

Class 3000, socket weld or threaded in


Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class

3000, socket weld in accordance with ASME B16.11.

Branch Fittings Integrally reinforced in accordance with MSS SP-97.

Unions Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L,

Class 3000, threaded or socket welded in


Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class

3000, socket weld in accordance with ASME B16.11.

Flanges None. ASTM A182, Grade F 304L, CL 150, forged, raised

face or flat face, slip-on or weld neck in accordance

with ASME B16.5. Bore to match pipe ID.

Bolting None. ASTM A193, Grade B8 CL 2, alloy steel studs, and

ASTM A194, Grade 8F, heavy hex nuts.

Gaskets None. For raised face: aramid fibers with EPDM binder,

1/8-in. thick, Garlock®37

Blueguard, Style 3700.

For flat face flanges: EPDM, 1/16-in. thick, Garlock

Series 8314.

Ball Valves

(2 way)

Stainless Steel body ASTM A351 Gr CF8M,

Full port, threaded end connections in

accordance with ASME B1.20.1, socket weld

ends in accordance with ASME B16.11, Tekfil

seat, Flowtek series 7000 (V-004 & V-014).

Stainless Steel body ASTM A351 Gr CF8M, Full port,

socket weld ends in accordance with ASME B16.11,

Tekfil seat, Flowtek series 7000 (V-009 & V-010).

Gate Valves See associated Drawings.

J. Pipe Casing

1. Raw Water: AWWA C151, Class 150, Ductile Iron Pipe

a. Spacers: Calpico Inc., Model M-Series Casing Insulators or

equivalent.

b. End Seals: Calpico Inc., Model W End Seals or equivalent.

K. Pipe Insulation: Cellular glass block or mineral fiber preformed insulation in

accordance with ASTM C547 or ASTM C552. Foamglas®38

by Pittsburgh

Corning Corporation.

L. Threaded Pipe Joint Sealant: Permabond®39

MH052 or approved substitute.

37

Garlock is a registered trademark of Garlock Sealing Technologies LLC, Palmyra, New York. 38

Foamglas is a registered trademark of Pittsburgh Corning Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. 39

Permabond is a registered trademark of Loxeal srl, Cesano Maderno, Italy.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 256 of 315


33 10 00 – 9

M. Solder: Lead-free type.

N. Raw Water Filters: Filter Specialists, Inc. Liquid Bag Filters, Model FSPN-250

#6-3” Flange, Dwg. 1901747. 316 Stainless Steel, hinged lid, 150-lb raised face

flanges, ASME Section VIII Division 1 stamped, 150 psi @ 250°F, 800 micron,

polypropylene filter bags. Contact: Gary Schulz, Control Factors – Portland,

Inc., 503-669-1185.

O. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer: The Reduced Pressure Backflow

Prevention Assembly shall be ASSE Listed 1013 and AWWA Compliant C511

and supplied with Clow R/W Model 2640 (FxF) – full port OS&Y gate valves.

The main body and access cover shall be epoxy coated ductile iron (ASTM A536

Grade 4), the seat ring and check valve shall be NORYL™40

, the stem shall be

Stainless Steel (ASTM A276) and the seat disc elastomers shall be EPDM. The

internals shall be series 300 Stainless Steel. The checks and the relief valve shall

be accessible for maintenance without removing the device from the line. The

Reduced Pressure Backflow Prevention Assembly shall be a ZURN

WILKINS®41

Model 375. The Reduced Pressure Backflow assembly shall be

fully assembled at the factory and shipped for field installation. Products shall be

listed on the Department of Health Approved Assemblies List with the

Washington State Department of Health.

P. Water Inlet Pressure Control Valve: The Pressure Reducing Control Valve with

Low Flow By-Pass shall be a pilot operated diaphragm valve designed to

automatically reduce a fluctuating higher upstream pressure to a constant lower

downstream pressure regardless of varying flow rates. Assembly shall be a globe

style with all internal cast components CF8M (316) Stainless Steel with a 250 psi

rating. The valve shall be Watts ACV Model 3” either LFF115-74 or

LFM115-74, 150# flanged raised-face, EPDM seal, with low flow by-pass.

Q. Five-valve Block and Bleed Manifold: Valve manifold for differential pressure

transmitter across the filter canisters shall be a 5 valve with 2 test ports, a vent

valve, and 2 equalize valves (as shown in Fig. 1). Unit shall be Stainless Steel

with hard seats and 1/2” FPT inlet and outlet ports in the configuration shown in

the diagram to the right. Assembly part number shall be a PGI International

M-578-SCT/HTAS.

40

NORYL is a trademark of Sabic Global Technologies B.V., Netherlands. 41

ZURN WILKINS is a registered trademark of Zurco, Inc., Wilmington, Delaware.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 257 of 315


33 10 00 – 10

R. Differential Pressure Transmitter: Pressure transmitter for the filters shall be a

4-20mA with communication, Stainless Steel wetted parts, 1/2” FPT process

connections, and a 5 to 500 kPa range. Part number shall be a Yokogawa®42

EJA110E-JHS4G 912DN/FF1.

S. Pressure Indicators: Pressure gauges shall be Stainless Steel, 0 – 300 psi range,

and a 4 1/2” dial size with 1/2” MPT bottom inlet fitting. Accuracy shall be to

ASME B40.1 Grade 1A (1%). Part number shall be a Ashcroft™43

45-1109-SD-

04L-0/300#.

T. Thermal Expansion (Pulsation Dampeners): Thermal Expansion units shall be

Hydropads®44

as manufactured by FLEXICRAFT, and shall consist of a

diaphragm-type Stainless Steel bellows unit enclosed by the outer shell. Bellows

shall be exposed internally to line pressure and all material in contact with line

fluid shall be Stainless Steel. Unit shall have sufficient volume between bellows

and other shell to limit pulsation to values noted on drawings. Unit shall have a

nominal gas capacity as noted on the P&ID. Unit shall be pre-charged with

nitrogen gas to the values as noted on the P&ID. Assembly shall be either

model 21 (100 in³) (socket weld inlet) or part number 320500 (32 in³) (threaded

inlet).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION



B. All underground utility locations shall be identified by means of marking tape.

Place tape in backfill directly above the utility line at approximately 12-in. below

grade.

42

Yokogawa is a registered trademark of Yokogawa Electric Corporation, Tokyo, Japan. 43

Ashcroft is a trademark of Ashcroft Inc., Stratford, Connecticut. 44

Hydropads is a registered trademark of Güntner GmbH & Co., Germany.

Figure 1

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 258 of 315


33 10 00 – 11

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Raw Water Pipe and Fittings

1. Install pipe and pipe accessories in accordance with AWWA C600

(Ductile Iron), ASTM A234 (Steel), manufacturer’s instructions,

NFPA 24, UPC, the drawings, and this Section.

2. Install thrust restraint at all bends, tees, plugs, and caps in accordance with

NFPA 24, Article 8-6. If concrete thrust blocks are used, size in

accordance with details shown on the contract drawings.

3. Fabricate and install Stainless Steel welded pipe and fittings and

components in accordance with ASME B31.9, the Drawings, and this

Section.

4. Make joints in threaded piping system with specified joint sealant. Apply

sealant to male threads only.

5. Coat buried carbon steel accessories, such as tie-rods and clamps, with

16.0 mils of Bitumastic in one or two coats (10-24 hours between coats).

Allow 8 hours for Bitumastic to dry before backfilling.

6. Painting and Markings: See Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” for preparation

and painting.

B. Valve Orientation






C. Sewer Drain Piping

1. Slope line 1/8 in. per ft (minimum) or as specified on drawings.

2. Install ABS or PVC pipeline in accordance with ASTM D2321 and the

drawings. In-line service testing of sewer pipe is permitted.

D. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer

1. Install in accordance with WAC 246-290 recognized cross-connection

control manual installation specifications including but not limited to the

specifications found in “Cross Connection Control Manual, Accepted

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 259 of 315


33 10 00 – 12

Procedures and Practices,” “Manual of Cross-Connection Control” or

AWWA M14.

E. Flanged Joints

1. Install flanges in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Clean joint surfaces of the pipe, fittings and valves being joined.

3. Align flange of pipe, fitting, or valve to be installed with flange of

receiving pipe, fitting, or valve.

4. Support pipe, fittings, and valves being joined so that flanges are properly

aligned.

5. Lubricate bolts/studs and nuts prior to installation of bolts and nuts.

6. Clean gasket of sand, dirt, and other foreign matter. Inspect gasket for

damage/defects.

F. Pipe supports: Fabricate and install as shown on the Drawings, in accordance

with manufacturer’s instructions, Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications,” and

applicable recommended procedures of MSS SP-58.

G. Weld Identification

1. Prepare weld identification drawings, isometric or spool, using existing

project Drawings as applicable which show relative positions of pressure-

containing welds and attachment welds to pressure-retaining components.

2. Assign weld numbers to pressure containing welds and attachment welds

to pressure-retaining components as made. Record weld number on weld

identification drawings as welds are made.

3. Do not reuse weld numbers. If a weld is completely replaced, assign a

new number.


A. Flushing/Testing Preparation


cleaning.

2. Obtain direction for disposal of flushing water from TOC Construction

Representative. See the Contract Statement of Work.

B. Raw Water Line Flushing

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 260 of 315


33 10 00 – 13

1. Flush raw water in accordance with NFPA 24, as applicable, for below

ground piping.

a. The underground pipe trench shall be partially backfilled between

joints before testing to prevent movement of pipe.

b. Notify Project Engineer at least five working days before flushing

of piping system for witnessing flush. Flushing to verify that new

lines are clean and acceptable.

c. Flush piping with water for five minutes minimum, and until

effluent is clean and contains no visible particulate matter.

Flushing pressure shall not exceed maximum operating pressure

specified for the system. Flushing water supply shall have

sufficient capacity to produce a full pipe (largest pipe size) flush.

d. Document flushing of each piping system on NFPA Form

“Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground and

Underground Piping,” in accordance with NFPA 24, as applicable,

and submit in accordance with Paragraph 1.3.



1. Perform examination for individual pipe sections. Acceptance Criteria,

unless otherwise noted by design, shall be in accordance with ASME

B31.9.

2. Perform visual examination (VT) on all completed welds in accordance

with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.

3. Perform random examination of piping support welds in accordance with


4. Examination Documentation





examinations and notation of satisfactory completion of pressure

testing in accordance with instructions on form.



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 261 of 315


33 10 00 – 14



package.



Test Record.

5. Final closure welds that cannot be isolated for testing shall be examined

in-process.

B. Raw Water Line Testing

1. Furnish instruments, facilities, and labor required to conduct tests.

2. Test gauges shall be calibrated and capable of measuring at least 1.5 times

test pressure, but no more than 4 times test pressure.

3. Document leak/pressure testing of each piping system on NFPA Form

“Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground or

Underground Piping,” in accordance with NFPA 24, as applicable, and

submit in accordance with 1.3.

4. Perform tests after lines have been flushed and before joints have been

backfilled for underground piping.

5. Remove all air from piping and adequately restrain pipe prior to

hydrostatic test for underground piping. The last thrust block poured shall

have cured a minimum of 7 days prior to test.

6. Test mainline at 200 psi for two hours or at 50 psi in excess of the

maximum static pressure and measure leakage of raw water lines in

accordance with NFPA 24, Article 8.9, for underground piping. Service

test trailer piping less than 3 in., use full mainline pressure for at least 30

minutes with no visible leaks or loss of test water. Repair any

unsatisfactory joints and retest.

7. Install a temporary relief valve during pressure test. Relief valve shall

have a discharge capacity of at least 125 percent of the pressurizing device

and be set to not more than 110 percent of the test pressure. Demonstrate

proper operation of relief valve before relief valve is attached to system

for leak test and whenever there is cause to question operating accuracy of

valve.

C. Sewer Line Testing

1. Before connecting to existing manhole, perform leak testing of pipe in

accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. Document test results.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 262 of 315


33 10 00 – 15

D. For Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer, verify and document the

following characteristics by visual inspection:

1. Device is installed in its proper orientation.

2. Device has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 263 of 315


40 05 13 – 1

SECTION 40 05 13

PROCESS PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of inside water piping beginning

after the backflow preventer and of outdoor below and above grade water piping

from the Air and Water Service Building to the Tank Farm Process Piping

manifolds.








ANSI/ASME A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems





Brazing Operations


ASME B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and

Threaded

ASME B31.9, 2014 Building Service Piping




RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 264 of 315


40 05 13 – 2



and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges

ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service


Shapes



Pipes



ASTM A403 Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings









Installation


Application

MSS SP-97 Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings







RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 265 of 315


40 05 13 – 3

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Welding Procedure Specifications and or Standard Welding Procedure


each in accordance with Paragraph 1.4.B.





information/record.





testing, submit testing procedure in accordance with Paragraphs 1.4.C and

3.4.B.


1. O&M manuals for equipment.


A. Misrepresented Products: See Contract Statement of Work for required measures

to prevent use of misrepresented products.

B. Qualifications of Structural Welding Personnel and Procedures.

1. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall be in

accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

2. Qualification of Examination Personnel: Maintain copies of examination


at jobsite.




RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 266 of 315


40 05 13 – 4

b. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE)




C. Qualification of Pressure Boundary Welders

1. For low-pressure systems, personnel and procedures for welding pressure-

retaining components, along with attachments hereto, shall be qualified in

accordance with ASME Section IX, except as modified by ASME B31.9,

Chapter V, Section 927.6.

D. Examination Procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with

AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.6, ASME Sec V as applicable, and this

Specification. Maintain copies of examination procedures at jobsite.

1. Qualification of Nondestructive Examination (NDE) personnel:

a. Visual weld examinations shall be performed and appropriate

documentation prepared by CWIs who have received certification

in accordance with AWS QC1. Certified Associate Welding

Inspections (CAWIs), certified in accordance with above standard,

may perform examinations when under immediate direction of

CWIs.

b. Personnel performing other NDE of welds shall be certified in

accordance with written practice, which shall meet requirements of

ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret test

results.

2. Welding-related examination documentation shall be signed or stamped by

individuals performing examinations.

E. Pressure and Leak Testing Procedures: Pressure testing procedures shall be in



1.5 PERMITS




RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 267 of 315


40 05 13 – 5

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Piping and Fittings: See details specified on the Drawings and Components List

section below.

B. Pipe Supports: See details specified on the Drawings and in Section 05 50 00

“Metal Fabrications.” U-bolts to be Stainless Steel or plastic coated.

C. Pipe Joint Sealant (Lubricant) for Threaded Joints. Use anaerobic acrylic sealer.

Henkel Corporation: Loctite 5452 or 567 or engineering approved equivalent.


D. Pipe covering protection saddle: B-Line B3160 and B3162, Stainless Steel, plain.

Diameter to match pipe diameter and insulation thickness as specified in Section

40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

E. Protective Coating for above and below grade Stainless Steel Piping: Exterior

epoxy protection system, SEAGUARD MP, 5-6 mil thick, per Section 09 91 00,

“Painting,” and per manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Valves: Specified in the Components List section below, unless otherwise shown

on the Drawings.

G. Hoses: UFBX1 T316L hose, with series 300 SS braid, and with T304L Schedule

40S pipe ends for socket welding. Lengths, reducers, and 90° long and short

radius elbows, as shown on the Drawings, and within the specifications of B31.9.

Each hose description in the Bill of Materials on the Drawings is described in

order of hose assembly. All lengths shall be ±1/4” of the indicated dimension on

the Drawings. Hose braid collars shall be 3/4” long for 1” hose and 1” long for

1.5”, 2”, and 3” hose. Long and short radius elbows shall be according to ASME

B16.9 dimensions. Pipe end dimensions called out on the Drawings are

intentionally long. Field verify dimensions, and cut to length during installation

as required. Follow all manufacturers’ specifications, especially the minimum

live length for vibration, minimum static bend radius, and maximum offset.

H. Pipe Flanges and Gaskets: Specified in the Components List section below.

I. Heat Tracing: As shown on the Drawings and per Section 40 41 00, “Process

Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”

J. Pipe Insulation System: See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment

Insulation.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 268 of 315


40 05 13 – 6

K. Cathodic Protection: See Section 13 47 13.13, “Cathodic Protection for

Underground and Submerged Piping.”

L. Buried Pipe Marker Tape: See Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

M. Penetration Sealants: RTV Silicone.

N. Anchors:

1. Concrete Anchor Blocks: See Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.”


Anchor Bolts.”

3. Anchorage must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Thermal Expansion (Pulsation Dampeners): Thermal Expansion units shall be

Hydropads as manufactured by FLEXICRAFT, and shall consist of a diaphragm-

type Stainless Steel bellows unit enclosed by the outer shell. Bellows shall be

exposed internally to line pressure and all material in contact with line fluid shall

be Stainless Steel. Unit shall have sufficient volume between bellows and other

shell to limit pulsation to values noted on drawings. Unit shall have a nominal

gas capacity as noted on the P&ID. Unit shall be pre-charged with nitrogen gas to

the values as noted on the P&ID. Assembly shall be either model 22 (200 in³)

(socket weld inlet), model 21 (100 in³) (socket weld inlet), or part number 320500

(32 in³) (threaded inlet).

B. Pressure Indicators: Pressure gauges shall be Stainless Steel, 0 – 300 psi range,

and a 4 1/2” dial size with 1/2” MPT bottom inlet fitting. Accuracy shall be to

ASME B40.1 Grade 1A (1%). Part number shall be a Ashcroft 45-1109-SD-04L-

0/300#.

C. Flow Orifice: Flow orifices for outside building accessory lines shall be a 2”

O-ring union with orifice insert sized to approximately 5/8 in., Class 3000, socket

weld and Stainless Steel. Hart Industries, p/n O-3333-8-E-304L. Orifice shall be

sized for the flow specified on the P&ID and adjusted accordingly.

D. Leak detector elements as indicated in the Drawings.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General




RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 269 of 315


40 05 13 – 7



Drawings.


steel in accordance with AWS D1.3, and Stainless Steel in accordance

with AWS D1.6 and ASME B31.9.






specific finishes.

C. Finishes

1. Prime ferrous metal (except Stainless Steel pipe) in accordance with

Section 09 91 00, “Painting.” Do not coat members to be embedded in

concrete, surfaces and edges to be field welded, or items to be galvanized.

Shop paint may extend into embedded areas where impractical to remove.

2. Stainless Steel piping shall not come in contact with galvanized surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION







3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Fabricate and install pipe and fittings and components in accordance with

ASME B31.9, the Drawings, and this Section.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 270 of 315


40 05 13 – 8

B. Valve Orientation








close the valve.

C. Identification

1. An identification tag shall be supplied and attached to the equipment,

valves, and components. 1/4” stamped or engraved characters shall be

used on a Stainless Steel tag. The tag shall include the equipment

identification number (EIN) as identified on the P&ID.

2. Piping Identification: Identify in-building and above grade piping systems

as to fluid carried and direction of flow as specified in ANSI/ASME B13.1

and also Attachment 1.

D. Pipe


2. Ream pipe to nominal inside diameter after cutting. Remove burrs before

assembly.



fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system.

4. Install piping with slope specified on the Drawings.



is prohibited.

6. Field verify lengths of make-up spool pipe sections as called out on the

Drawings. Cut and weld to fit after all other spools are in place.

E. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint sealant specified. Apply sealant

sparingly to male threads only.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 271 of 315


40 05 13 – 9

F. Flanged Joints






aligned.



damage/defects.

7. Install flange isolation kits per manufacturer instructions on every flange

adjacent to a below grade section of piping.

G. Pipe covering protection saddles: Pressure boundary weld to pipe in accordance

with manufacturer’s instructions and located per drawings. Locate one centered

on bottom of pipe for all piping roller support locations. Locate one centered on

top of pipe for all piping roller support locations, except vertical expansion loops

as called out on the Drawings.

H. Pipe supports: Fabricate and install as shown on the Drawings, in accordance



I. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor

Bolts.”

J. Tools marked for Stainless Steel shall be used on Stainless Steel only. Tools

previously used on carbon steel shall not be used on Stainless Steel. Areas on

Stainless Steel pipe that show signs of coming in contact with carbon steel (rust

marks or streaks) shall be cleaned of all free iron.

K. Below Grade Piping:

1. Trenches: Excavate, backfill, and compact in accordance with Section

31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

2. Install insulation using temporary supports on undisturbed soil, or on

backfill placed and compacted in accordance with Section 31 23 00

“Excavation and Fill.” Install below grade insulation system prior to

backfilling trench in accordance with Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping

and Equipment Insulation.”

3. At piping bends provide cushions for thermal expansion according to

Section 40 42 00, Paragraph 2.2.D.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 272 of 315


40 05 13 – 10

L. Exterior Protective Coating for all Outside Above and Below Grade Piping:

1. Before coating application over joints, perform NDE, flushing, and

leak/pressure testing specified in this Section.

2. Protect Stainless Steel pipe, fittings, and pipe covering protection saddles

with coating specified above in Paragraph 2.2, “Materials,” in accordance

with Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” and manufacturer’s instructions.

3. After installation, examine pipe, joints, and fittings with electrical holiday

detector in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Repair damage to coating in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.

5. Do not install insulation system or backfill until coating has cured in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

M. Welding

1. Weld piping and attachments to pressure-retaining components in





N. Weld Identification




2. Assign weld numbers to pressure containing welds and attachment welds




new number.

4. Show heat/lot numbers on weld identification drawings for materials

requiring Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs).

O. Perform examination, flushing, and leak/pressure testing, and connecting of heat

tracing before application of insulation and jacketing over joints and other

materials and components.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 273 of 315


40 05 13 – 11

P. Heat Trace: Install per Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat

Tracing.”

Q. Piping Insulation System: Install per Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and

Equipment Insulation.”




cleaning.



B. Cleaning and Flushing








a. When high-pressure water jetting or other mechanical cleaning

method utilizing water is used, and leak/pressure testing will not be

performed immediately after cleaning, remove all water.



cleanliness.





1. Perform examination for individual pipe sections listed below in


shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9.


Paragraph 936.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 274 of 315


40 05 13 – 12














package.



Test Record.


in-process.


1. After completion of mechanical cleaning and NDE, perform leak testing

of pipe in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Section. Use calibrated

gages with an accuracy of ± 1 psi and with ranges 1-1/2 to 4 times test

pressure.



“Description” describe piping system in enough detail for correlation to




3. Pipe joints and connections to be tested shall be visible and accessible

during tests.




RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 275 of 315


40 05 13 – 13





pressures.



during testing.

8. Complete testing of piping before field application of insulation.

9. Purge air from piping systems during filling, before applying pressure.

10. Continuously maintain test pressure for 10 minutes minimum. Examine

joints and connections. Piping system, exclusive of possible localized

instances at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of

weeping or leaking.

11. Remove water from piping systems after testing using low point drains or

by applying low air pressure at connection points and blowing down the

lines.

12. Perform leak/pressure testing in accordance with ASME B31.9, Chapter

VI, Section 937, and this Section.

13. Support the final in-service leak test of the whole system to the extent

directed by the TOC Construction Representative.

3.5 SCHEDULES


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 276 of 315


40 05 13 – 14

NDE/NDT Method Raw Water Piping

Legend:

A. All completed welds to have visual

examination by AWS QC1 qualified

weld inspector shall be in accordance

with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.4.1

and fulfill the minimum requirements.

B. Full penetration welds on branch

connections.

C. Attachment welds to pipe.

D. Hydrostatic pressure test all joints.

Visual A

Fit

Root Pass

Cover Pass A

Liquid Penetrant

Root Pass

Cover Pass

Magnetic Particle

Root Pass

Cover Pass

Radiographic

Completed Weld

Ultrasonic

Completed Weld

Leak/Pressure

Completed Joints B, C, D

Other

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 277 of 315


40 05 13 – 15

B. Components List


(psig)

Hydrostatic Test

Pressure (psig)

Design Temp

(°F)

Inlet and Cold Water Discharge up to Manifold

Piping 150 225 +10/-0 140

Cold Water Discharge Piping

(Inside – after the Manifold, Below Grade, or

Above Grade Outside)

150 225 +10/-0 180

Hot Water Inlet and Recirculation Piping 250 375 +10/-0 140

Hot Water Discharge Piping

(Inside, Below Grade, or Above Grade Outside) 250 375 +10/-0 180

Sizes 3/4 in. & smaller 1 in. to 4 in. 6 in & larger

Pipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP304L, seamless. Pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated

spools as specified on the Drawings.

Wall Thickness Schedule 80S. Schedule 40S and Schedule 80S (only if indicated as threaded

on the Drawings).

Fittings Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000,

socket weld, butt weld, or threaded in accordance with

ASME B16.9 and B16.11.

Stainless Steel, ASTM A403 WP304L

Class S, full penetration butt weld in

accordance with ASME B16.9

Branch Fittings Integrally reinforced Stainless Steel in accordance with MSS SP-97.

O-ring Unions 304L Stainless Steel, Socket Weld or Threaded, EPDM o-

ring, Class 3000, Manufacturer: Hart Industries.

None.

Flanges None. ASTM A182, Grade F 304L, CL 150 and CL 300, forged,

raised face, slip-on or weld neck in accordance with

ASME B16.5. Bore to match pipe ID.

Flange Isolation

Kits

Flange Isolation Gasket Kit, Type F Raised Face, ASME B16.5, Aramid fibers with EPDM binder,

1/16 in. thick, Garlock Blueguard, Style 3700, match pipe size, single washer 1 piece phenolic,

Nomex Sleeve (GPT Industries or equivalent).

Bolting None. ASTM A193, Grade B8 CL 2, alloy steel studs, and ASTM

A194, Grade 8, heavy hex nuts.

Gaskets None. Aramid fibers with EPDM binder, 1/16-in. thick, Garlock

Blueguard, Style 3700.

Ball Valves (2

way)

Stainless Steel body ASTM A351

Gr CF8M, Full port, threaded end

connections in accordance with

ASME B1.20.1, socket weld ends

in accordance with ASME B16.11,

Tekfil seat, Flowtek series 7000.

None.

Globe Valves None. Stainless Steel body ASTM A351, Class 300, OS&Y bonnet,

plug type disc, socket weld ends, Powell Figure 2447 (1).

Gate Valves See associated Drawings. None.

Insulation See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation” (according to outside location:

either Below Grade or Above Grade).

Heat Trace On any outside piping whether below or above grade with 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable.

See Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 278 of 315


40 05 13 – Att. 1-1


IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS

1. GENERAL

Identification of piping systems shall be in accordance with the American Standard

Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems, ANSI/ASME A13.1, as supplemented

herein, and with TFC-ENG-STD-12, “Tank Farm Equipment Identification

Numbering and Labeling Standard.”

2. LOCATION

a. Except as provided below, identification shall be located adjacent to outlets,

valves, flanges, unions, changes-in-direction, where pipes through walls, floors,

or ceilings, and along an uninterrupted length of pipe at maximum intervals of

50 ft. Each line or branch in shall have a least one identification.

b. Where a number of outlets, valves, flanges, unions, or changes of direction make

identification at each item impracticable, they may be spaced at approximate 6-ft

intervals, preferably adjacent to valves.

c. Legend shall be located on pipe so that it can be read easily from operator’s

normal viewing position. Labels shall be placed on readily visible lower quadrant

of overhead pipes, an on an upper quadrant of pipes below normal eye level.

3. LEGEND

a. Positive identification of piping system content shall be by lettered legend giving

name of content in full or abbreviated form. Legends may also be as specified on

the Drawings or in other specifications.

b. Abbreviation of words in legend may be used only where unavoidable due to

space limitations.

c. Legend shall include nominal operating pressure and/or temperature when

specified.

d. An arrow indicating direction of flow shall be placed near legend on pipes

normally having a flow in 1 direction only. Color and size of arrow shall be

consistent with color and size of legend letters.

e. Legend shall be located on or adjacent to classification color band.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 279 of 315


40 05 13 – Att. 1-2

4. APPROVED LABELS

a. Legend and color classification may be accomplished by use of approved labels

that conform to this Standard and are suitable for temperature of surface to which

they are applied. Approved labels include the following:

Stock System #4 Pipe Markers

www.pipemarker.com

Brimar Industries

P.O. Box 467 / 64 Outwater Lane

Garfield NJ 07026

Ph: 800-274-6271

High Performance Pipe Markers

www.bradyid.com

Brady WORLDWIDE

6555 W. Good Hope Rd

Milwaukee, WI 53223

b. Single-word labels may be combined to form complete legends. Individual-letter

labels shall not be combined.

c. Labels shall be installed after painting is complete.

5. CLASSIFICATION COLOR shall conform to ANSI/ASME A13.1

END OF ATTACHMENT 1

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 280 of 315


40 05 22 – 1

SECTION 40 05 22

HOSE-IN-HOSE TRANSFER LINE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The hose-in-hose transfer line (HIHTL) will be located within the 241-AX Tank

Farm, 241-AZ Tank Farm, and the intra-farm area between the two tank farms.

The HIHTL system will connect the 241-AX waste retrieval equipment to a

portable above ground valve box assembly within the 241-AX Tank Farm and

from the valve box to designated connections in the 241-AZ tank farm. The

furnished HIHTL assemblies will consist of a flexible primary hose installed

within a secondary encasement hose. The primary hose will be wrapped with heat

tape and the secondary hose with insulation to prevent significant cooling of the

conveyed fluid as it flows through the assembly, minimizing the risk of plugging.








ASME B31.3, 2012 Process Piping


ASTM D380 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Hose


TFC-ENG-STD-21 Hose-in-Hose Transfer Line

RPP-14859 Specification for Hose-in-Hose Transfer Lines

D. Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)

RMA IP-2 Hose Handbook, Washington D.C.

E. Washington Administrative Code (WAC)

WAC 173-303 Dangerous Waste Regulations

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 281 of 315


40 05 22 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS




testing, submit two copies of testing procedure in accordance with

Paragraphs 1.4.B and 3.4.A.


1. Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs): With delivery, submit two

copies of legible reports, certified by responsible manufacturer of

materials used in fabrication of pipe, fittings, flanges, and weld filler

material for the individual pipe sections listed below. Reports shall

present results of chemical analysis and physical tests specified in ASME,

ASTM, or AWS Codes or Standards as applicable and Standard

Specifications for production lots and heats of materials. Submit separate

reports for the individual pipe sections.

2. Material traceability shall be maintained through fabrication for material

requiring CMTRs.




B. Pressure and Leak Testing Procedures: Pressure testing procedures shall be in



C. Assigned personnel to perform work have reviewed and are familiar with the

HIHTL system, associated handling recommendations, and the connection

methods for HIHTL assemblies.

D. Deleted.



B. Storage of the HIHTL materials shall be in accordance with the following:

1. Hose assembly shall be stored as shipped, on reel, in either vertical or

horizontal position.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 282 of 315


40 05 22 – 3

2. Hose assembly should be stored in its original shipping/packing materials

so that plastic wrapping and cardboard covering will provide some

protection against possible deteriorating elements. Additionally, if stored

outside, the material shall be covered with a tarpaulin or other protective

covering.

3. Hose ends shall be kept covered by wrapping in plastic and securing.

4. Exposure to direct and reflected sunlight should be avoided. If the hose is

exposed to the sun for a prolonged period, a section of hose should be

inspected for deterioration every two years. Inspect hose for any damage

to or holes in insulation and inspect fittings for visible damage.

5. Optimum storage area is in a covered area that is cool and dark, and free

of dampness and mildew.

6. Maximum shelf life is 7 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, HIHTL system materials, including the

portable valve box, will be Government Furnished Equipment (GFE).

1. The HIHTL is classified as Safety Significant.

2. HIHTLs shall be in accordance with TFC-ENG-STD-21.

B. Bolt thread lubricant (high stress compound, anti-seize).

C. Calibrated torque wrenches.

D. Deleted.

E. Shielding materials as indicated on Drawings.

F. Deleted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine designated routing for the HIHTL systems and notify TOC Construction

Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely

completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions

have been addressed and/or corrected.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 283 of 315


40 05 22 – 4

B. Assigned personnel to perform work have reviewed and are familiar with the

HIHTL system, associated handling recommendations, and the connection

methods for HIHTL assemblies.

C. Prepare routing path and tie-in connections for installation of HIHTL assemblies.

Coordinate with TOC Construction Representative for delivery of materials to the

site.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install HIHTL assemblies as shown on the Drawings.

B. Use care in unwrapping plastic and cardboard to avoid damage to hose, fittings,

and heat trace.

C. If a spindle is used to unroll hose, provisions must be in place to slow the reel as it

unwinds to control the roll off of the hose.

D. Never pull on HIHTL assemblies by the ends alone. Use a choker strap at some

point along the hose length.

E. If temperatures have been below 32ºF, the hose may be stiff and require warming

before installation. Notify TOC Construction Representative for instructions if

warming is required.

F. Leave assembly connections covered and protected until in place to actually

connect assembly to equipment.

G. Connect primary hose joints using a qualified quality controlled procedure per

manufacturer’s directions.

1. Primary hose connections are male to female ChemJoint.

2. The male and female threads have been treated with Everlube, a dry film

lubricant. No additional lubricant or anti-seize material should be applied.

3. The o-ring should have one white and two yellow dots visible indicating it

is the specified material, EPDM.

4. Verify cleanliness, correct o-ring, and then join the hose assembly.

5. Torque for the ChemJoint fitting is 200 ft-lbs or hand tight plus 1 to 1-1/2

notches of the nut. Contact TOC Construction Representative for

clarification on turn of the nut torque method from vendor information.

6. Apply set screws and tighten with 1/8-inch Allen wrench to the point that

the ChemJoint nut cannot turn.

H. Test primary hose in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 284 of 315


40 05 22 – 5

I. Prior to final joining of secondary hose connections, verify heat trace is spliced

and/or heat trace lead is clear of the joint and available for termination.

J. Connect secondary hose joints using a qualified quality controlled procedure per

manufacturer’s directions.

1. Secondary hose connections will be one of two types. One joint will be

flange connector consisting of 6 inch, 150 lb raised face flange that would

bolt directly to a mating flange on equipment/valve box. The other joint

will be a threaded union end connector consisting of a 6 inch, 150 lb

raised face flange that would connect to another hose assembly and/or

equipment.

2. Make both of these connections in accordance with details shown on the

Drawings.

3. Verify cleanliness of the visible area of hose and connection.

4. Apply approved lubricant to flange bolt threads and tighten in sequence

that uniformly loads the gasket. For connections using raised face flanges

with EPDM gaskets, final torque bolts to 40 ft-lbs.

K. Below Grade HIHTL

1. Trenches: Excavate in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation

and Fill.”

2. Deleted.

3. Deleted.

4. Backfill and compact in accordance with the drawings.

L. Deleted.

1. Deleted.

2. Deleted.

3. Deleted.

4. Deleted.

5. Deleted.

M. Deleted.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 285 of 315


40 05 22 – 6


A. Notify TOC Construction Representative prior to installation of HIHTL for

witnessing of activities by Independent Qualified Registered Professional

Engineer (IQRPE), as required by WAC 173-303.

B. Perform visual inspection of encasement hose for damage. Minor cosmetic

damage to the insulation is acceptable. If visible damage is present, inspect for

potential leak paths and notify TOC Construction Representative. If suspect,

remove hose from service and retest.

C. Inspect the HIHTL assembly end connections and ensure they are clean and free

of debris.

D. Inspect the hose assemblies and connections described in Paragraph 3.2. Verify

final connections have been properly assembled and torqued.

E. Refer to Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing,” for heat

trace testing requirements.

F. Perform visual inspection of equipment insulation for excessive damage. Minor

cosmetic damage to the insulation is acceptable. Record results.

G. Verify a minimum of 2 inch of soil cover is in place above the hose assembly

prior to installation of cover plates.


A. Pressure and Leak Testing

1. Install one temporary relief valve during testing to protect HIHTL against



2. Joints and connections to be tested shall be visible and accessible during

tests.


pressures.

4. Deleted.

5. Deleted.

a. Deleted.

i. Deleted.

ii. Deleted.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 286 of 315


40 05 22 – 7

b. Deleted.

6. Perform leak test for primary hose connection per TFC-ENG-STD-21.

Note: Leak testing per this section will be performed on components that

have already been hydrostatically tested as subassemblies per ASME

B31.3.

a. Leak testing of the HIHTL primary hose assembly connections

shall be performed by visual observation. The connection leak

testing shall be performed with water at the interfacing water

system pressure except when (a) there is no waste transfer system

valve downstream of the connection; or (b) closing the valve with

water flowing causes a flow transient (water hammer) that could

damage safety-significant waste transfer system structures,

systems, or components (SSCs). For this leak test, the interfacing

water system pressure is maintained at the connection for at least

10 min. If there is no valve downstream of the connection or

closing the valve causes an unacceptable water hammer, leak

testing is allowed with water flowing through the connection. This

leak test requires a minimum water flow of 200 gal through the

connection after flow is established in the line. If leak testing with

water is not practical (i.e., no available water source), leak testing

may be performed at the beginning of the initial waste transfer

through the connection. This leak test also requires a minimum

waste flow of 200 gal through the connection after flow is

established in the line.

Leakage observed at the HIHTL primary hose assembly

connections during the leak test shall be eliminated. Subsequent

leak testing of HIHTL primary hose assembly connections is not

required unless the connection is unmade and remade.

7. Secondary Hose

a. Perform pneumatic pressure test of the encasement hose at 10 +/- 2

psig. Maintain pressure for 10 minutes. Apply soap bubble

solution to ensure no leakage at connections and any other location

specified by the TOC Construction Representative. Where

isolation of a connection is not possible, perform a final visual

examination of the joint configuration/makeup to verify it

conforms to the Drawings. Record results. The PRV shall be set

at ≤ 50 psig. The secondary hoses have a minimum design

pressure of 60 psig (or greater) and therefore a PRV setting of 50

psig does not pose a safety concern.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 287 of 315


40 05 22 – 8

8. Document testing of each HIHTL system on Pressure Test Certification.

Use separate forms to describe and record each system. Under

“Description” describe HIHTL system in enough detail for correlation to

Drawings, as applicable. For systems tested segmentally, indicate

continuity in “Description” to ensure that entire systems have been tested.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 288 of 315


40 24 10 – 1

SECTION 40 24 10

CHEMICAL PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of above and below grade chemical

piping, equipment, and fittings for transferring sodium hydroxide (up to 50%

solution) and oxalic acid (up to 8%).








ANSI/ASME A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems



Section V Nondestructive Examination

Section IX Qualification Standard for Welding and

Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and

Welding and Brazing Operations

ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings


ASME B31.3, 2012 Process Piping




RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 289 of 315


40 24 10 – 2



and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges

ASTM A193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications

ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service


Shapes



Pipes



ASTM A403 Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings









Installation


Application

MSS-SP-97 Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 290 of 315


40 24 10 – 3





1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Welding Procedure Specifications and/or Standard Welding Procedure


procedures as required by Paragraph 1.4.B.



3. Examination Documentation: Five days before start of fabrication, submit


information/record.





testing, submit testing procedure in accordance with Paragraphs 1.4.C and

3.4.B.


1. O&M manuals for equipment.

2. Vendor information: Before installation, submit the following

information.

a. For Filter, submit: Dimensional drawings; Specifications;

Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions; Spare Parts

List.

b. For Flow Meter, submit: Dimensional drawings; Specifications;

Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions; Spare Parts

List.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 291 of 315


40 24 10 – 4




B. Qualifications of Structural Welding Personnel and Procedures.

1. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall be in

accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

2. Qualification of Examination Personnel: Maintain copies of examination


at jobsite.




b. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDEs)




C. Qualification of Pressure Boundary Welders

1. For low-pressure systems, personnel and procedures for welding pressure-

retaining components, along with attachments hereto, shall be qualified in

accordance with ASME Section IX, except as modified by ASME B31.3,

Chapter V, Paragraph 328.2.

D. Examination Procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with

AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.6, ASME Section V, and ASME B31.3 as

applicable, and this Specification. Maintain copies of examination procedures at

jobsite.

1. Qualification of NDE personnel:

a. Visual weld examinations shall be performed and appropriate

documentation prepared by CWIs who have received certification

in accordance with AWS QC1. Certified Associate Welding

Inspections (CAWIs), certified in accordance with above standard,

may perform examinations when under immediate direction of

CWIs.

b. Personnel performing other NDE of welds shall be certified in

accordance with written practice, which shall meet requirements of

ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret test

results.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 292 of 315


40 24 10 – 5

2. Welding-related examination documentation shall be signed or stamped by

individuals performing examinations.

E. Pressure and Leak Testing Procedures: Pressure testing procedures shall be in



1.5 PERMITS




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Piping and Fittings: See details specified on the Drawings and in Paragraph

3.5.B, “Components List.”

B. Pipe Supports: Unless otherwise specified in the details on the Drawings and in

Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications,” use standard components in accordance

with MSS SP-69 that satisfy the criteria of MSS SP-58. U-bolts to be Stainless

Steel or plastic coated.

C. Pipe Joint Sealant (Lubricant) for Threaded Joints. Use anaerobic acrylic sealer.

Henkel Corporation: Loctite 5452 or 567 or engineering approved equivalent.


D. Pipe covering protection saddle: B-Line B3162, Stainless Steel, plain. Diameter

to match pipe diameter and insulation thickness as specified in Section 40 42 00,

“Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

E. Protective Coating for above and below grade Stainless Steel Piping: Exterior

epoxy protection system, SEAGUARD MP, 5-6 mil thick, per Section 09 91 00,

“Painting,” and per manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Valves: As shown on the Drawings.

G. Pipe Flanges and Gaskets: Specified on the Drawings and in Paragraph 3.5.B,

“Components List.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 293 of 315


40 24 10 – 6

H. Heat Tracing: As shown on the Drawings and per Section 40 41 00, “Process

Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”

I. Pipe Insulation System: See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment

Insulation.”

J. Cathodic Protection: See Section 13 47 13.13, “Cathodic Protection for

Underground and Submerged Piping.”

K. Flange and Valve Safety Spray Shields: TFE Spra-Gard®45

(Ramco

Manufacturing Company, Inc) or equivalent.

L. Buried Pipe Marker Tape: See Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

M. Penetration Sealants: RTV Silicone.

N. Anchors:

1. Concrete Anchor Blocks: See Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.”


Anchor Bolts.”

3. Anchorage must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. As specified on the Drawings.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General






Drawings.


steel in accordance with AWS D1.3, and Stainless Steel in accordance

with AWS D1.6 and ASME B31.3.




45

Spra-Gard is a registered trademark of Ramco Manufacturing Company, Inc., Kenilworth, New Jersey.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 294 of 315


40 24 10 – 7



specific finishes.

C. Finishes

1. Prime ferrous metal (except Stainless Steel Piping) in accordance with

Section 09 91 00, “Painting.” Do not coat members to be embedded in

concrete, surfaces and edges to be field welded, or items to be galvanized.

Shop paint may extend into embedded areas where impractical to remove.

2. Stainless Steel piping shall not come in contact with galvanized surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION







3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Fabricate and install pipe, fittings, and components in accordance with

ASME B31.3, the Drawings and this Section.

B. Valves

1. Install valves orientated as shown on Drawings where clearly illustrated.





close the valve.

C. Identification

1. An identification tag shall be supplied and attached to the equipment,

valves, and components. 1/4” stamped or engraved characters shall be

used on a Stainless Steel tag. The tag shall include the equipment

identification number (EIN) as identified on the P&ID.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 295 of 315


40 24 10 – 8

2. Piping Identification: Identify above grade piping systems as to fluid

carried and direction of flow as specified in ANSI/ASME B13.1 and also

Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping,” Attachment 1, “Identification of

Piping Systems.”

D. Pipe


2. Ream pipe to nominal inside diameter after cutting. Remove burrs before

assembly.



fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system.



is prohibited.

5. Field verify lengths of make-up spool pipe sections as called out on the

Drawings. Cut and weld to fit after all other spools are in place.

E. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint sealant specified. Apply sealant

sparingly to male threads only.

F. Flanged Joints






aligned.



damage/defects.

7. Install flange isolation kits per manufacturer instructions on every flange

adjacent to a below grade section of piping.

8. Field install flange safety spray shields at all temporary hose connections

per manufacturer’s instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 296 of 315


40 24 10 – 9

G. Pipe covering protection saddles: Pressure boundary weld to pipe in accordance

with manufacturer’s instructions and located per drawings. Locate one centered

on bottom of pipe for all piping roller support locations. Locate one centered on

top of pipe for all piping roller support locations, except vertical expansion loops

as called out on the Drawings.

H. Pipe supports: Fabricate and install as shown on the Drawings, in accordance



I. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor

Bolts.”

J. Tools marked for Stainless Steel shall be used on Stainless Steel only. Tools

previously used on carbon steel shall not be used on Stainless Steel. Areas on

Stainless Steel pipe that show signs of coming in contact with carbon steel (rust

marks or streaks) shall be cleaned of all free iron.

K. Below Grade Piping:

1. Trenches: Excavate, backfill, and compact in accordance with

Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

2. Install insulation using temporary supports on undisturbed soil, or on

backfill placed and compacted in accordance with Section 31 23 00,

“Excavation and Fill.” Install below grade insulation system prior to

backfilling trench in accordance with Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping

and Equipment Insulation.”

3. At piping bends, provide cushions for thermal expansion according to

Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation,”

Paragraph 2.2.D.

L. Exterior Protective Coating for all Outside Above and Below Grade Piping:

1. Before coating application over joints, perform NDE, flushing, and

leak/pressure testing specified in this Section.

2. Protect Stainless Steel pipe, fittings, and pipe covering protection saddles

with coating specified in Paragraph 2.2, “Materials,” in accordance with

Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” and manufacturer’s instructions.

3. After installation, examine pipe, joints, and fittings with electrical holiday

detector in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Repair damage to coating in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 297 of 315


40 24 10 – 10

5. Do not install insulation system or backfill until coating has cured in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

M. Welding

1. Weld piping and attachments to pressure-retaining components in





N. Weld Identification




2. Assign weld numbers to pressure-containing welds and attachment welds




new number.

4. Show heat/lot numbers on weld identification drawings for materials

requiring Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs).

O. Perform examination, flushing, and leak/pressure testing, and connecting of heat

tracing before application of insulation and jacketing over joints and other

materials and components.

P. Heat Trace: Install per Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat

Tracing.”

Q. Piping Insulation System: Install per Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and

Equipment Insulation.”




cleaning.



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 298 of 315


40 24 10 – 11

B. Cleaning and Flushing








a. When high-pressure water jetting or other mechanical cleaning

method utilizing water is used, and leak/pressure testing will not be

performed immediately after cleaning, remove all water.



cleanliness.





1. Perform examination for individual pipe sections listed below in


shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3, “Normal Service.”


Paragraph 341.4.1(a). Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with

Table 341.3.2.

3. Perform in-process examination in accordance with ASME B31.3,

Paragraph 344.7. Liquid penetrant inspection shall be performed in

accordance with ASME B&PVC, Section V, Article 7 on root and final

weld surfaces when in-process examination is performed.

4. Radiographic examination (RT): Perform in accordance with ASME

B&PVC, Section V, Article 2 and ASME B31.3, Paragraph 344.5.2.

Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3, Table

341.3.2.

a. Identify radiographic film with weld identification number, weld

spool identification and project or work order number assigned to

work covered by this Section.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 299 of 315


40 24 10 – 12

b. Prepare radiographic examination reports as follows:

i. List each radiographic exposure location (0-1, 1-2, etc.)

individually on radiographic examination report.

ii. Indicate location acceptability or rejectability and note

discontinuities whether rejectable or not.

iii. When report includes radiographs of welds that have been

repaired, indicate which welds are repair welds and how

many times each weld has been repaired.

c. If additional welding is performed on weld area that has already

been examined radiographically; this area is a repair area. Identify

subsequent radiographs by “R-1, R-2,” etc.


Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications,” and ASME B31.3,

Paragraph 341.4.1.












package.



Test Record.


in-process.

8. Spray shield installation verification: Provide documented evidence that

spray shields have been installed on all temporary hose connections along

the chemical route piping.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 300 of 315


40 24 10 – 13


1. After completion of mechanical cleaning and NDE, perform hydrostatic

leak/pressure testing of individual piping sections and of the whole

assembly in accordance with ASME B31.3, Chapter VI, Paragraph 345

and this Section. Use calibrated gages with an accuracy of ± 1 psi and

with ranges 1-1/2 to 4 times test pressure.



“Description,” describe piping system in enough detail for correlation to




3. Pipe weld joints and connections to be tested shall be visible and

accessible during tests.


over-pressurization. Relief valve shall have a discharge capacity of 125%

of capacity of pressurizing device, and be set to operate at 110% of the

maximum of test pressure for hydrostatic testing. Tag each relief valve

used to show serial number, inspector, date, and pressure setting.





pressures.



during testing.

8. Complete testing of piping before field application of insulation.

9. Purge air from piping systems during filling, before applying pressure.

10. Continuously maintain test pressure for 10 minutes minimum. Examine

joints and connections in accordance with ASME B31.3. Piping system,

exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing, shall

show no visual evidence of weeping or leaking.

11. Remove water from piping systems after testing using low point drains or

by applying low air pressure at connection points and blowing down the

lines.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 301 of 315


40 24 10 – 14

12. Where impractical, and as approved by TOC Construction Representative,

an in-service leak test may be performed in lieu of a hydrostatic test on

final closures as per ASME B31.3 Paragraph 345.1(a).

13. Support the final in-service leak test of the whole system to the extent

directed by the TOC Construction Representative.

3.5 SCHEDULES


NDE/NDT Method Chemical Piping

Legend:

A. All final welds for pressure boundary and

pressure boundary attachments to have a

visual examination by AWS QC1

qualified weld inspector shall be in

accordance with ASME B31.3,

Paragraph 341.4.1(a) and fulfill the

minimum requirements.

B. Circumferential butt-welds.

C. Full penetration welds on branch

connections.

D. Hydrostatic pressure test all joints.

E. Liquid penetrant inspection required

when in process examination is

performed.

F. Attachment welds to pipe.

Visual

Fit

Root Pass

Cover Pass A

Liquid Penetrant

Root Pass E

Cover Pass E

Magnetic Particle

Root Pass

Cover Pass

Radiographic

Completed Weld (5%) B

Ultrasonic

Completed Weld

Leak/Pressure

All Joints B, C, D, F

Other

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 302 of 315


40 24 10 – 15

B. Components List


(psig)

Hydrostatic Test

Pressure (psig)

Design Temp

(°F)

Chemical Piping

(CHEMB) 200 300 +10/-0 180

Sizes All Sizes

Pipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP316L, seamless. Pre-fabricated heat-traced and

insulated spools as specified on the Drawings.

Wall Thickness Schedule 40S.

Fittings Stainless steel, ASTM A403, Class WP 316L or 316, butt-welding in accordance with ASME

B16.9.

Flanges ASTM A182, Grade F 316L, CL 300, forged, raised face, weld neck in accordance with

ASME B16.5. Bore to match pipe ID.

Flange Isolation

Kits

Flange Isolation Gasket Kit, Type F Raised Face, ASME B16.5, Aramid fibers with EPDM

binder, 1/16 in. thick, Garlock Blueguard, Style 3700, match pipe size, single washer 1 piece

phenolic, Nomex Sleeve (GPT Industries or equivalent).

Bolting ASTM A193, Grade B8 CL 2, alloy steel studs, and ASTM A194, Grade 8, heavy hex nuts.

Gaskets Aramid fibers with EPDM binder, 1/16-in. thick, Garlock Blueguard, Style 3700.

Valves

See associated Drawings.

Insulation See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation” (according to outside

location: either Below Grade or Above Grade).

Heat Trace –

below grade

On any Chemical Piping below grade: 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable. Quantity 2

(one on each side of the pipe near the bottom) so as to provide 10 Watts per foot and to

provide redundancy and meet the required lengths. See Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and

Equipment Heat Tracing.”

Heat Trace –

above grade

On any Chemical Piping above grade: 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable. Quantity 2

(one on each side of the pipe near the bottom). See Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and

Equipment Heat Tracing.”


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 303 of 315


40 41 00 – 1

SECTION 40 41 00

PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT HEAT TRACING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Installation and testing of above and below grade water and process piping and

hoses heat tracing.








ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems




TFC-ENG-STD-02 Environmental and Seasonal Requirements for TOC

Systems, Structures, and Components

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Submit test procedures to be used with acceptance criteria prior to testing.

2. Submit records of inspections, tests, and adjustments described in 3.3.


1. Catalog Data: With delivery, submit two copies of catalog data for heater

cable, thermostat, controls, fittings, indicator lights, and pipe markers.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 304 of 315


40 41 00 – 2

2. Includes rated capacities, operating characteristics, specialties, and

accessories.

3. Operation and Maintenance Data: With delivery, submit two copies of

operation and maintenance instructions.

4. Warranty: Manufacturer agreement for replacement of electric heating

cable due to failure in materials or workmanship.


A. Misrepresented Products: See the Statement of Work or required measures to


B. Products shall be obtained from qualified suppliers, meeting NEC requirements,

or be commercial grade items (CGI) meeting acceptance criteria specified in this

Section. Commercial grade dedication will be performed by Buyer.



B. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to manufacturer’s

instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES

A. See the Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General

1. Furnish electric heat tracing system(s) as shown on the Drawings with all

components, controls, and accessories required for a complete and

operating system.

2. Self-Regulating, Parallel-Resistance Heating Cable System

3. 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable, 120V. Raychem 5BTV1-CT

(for truck fill piping on the northwest corner of the 241-A-285 building,

and where specified on the drawings).

4. 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable, 240V. Raychem 5BTV2-CT.

5. 8 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable, 240V. Raychem 8BTV2-CT.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 305 of 315


40 41 00 – 3

6. End Seal Kit. Raychem E-150.

7. Power Connection box with Red Indicating Light. Raychem

JBM-100-L-A.

8. Splice Kit. Raychem S-150. For all below grade splices.

9. Above Insulation Splice Kit Tee. Raychem T-100. For all above grade

splices.

10. Above Insulation End Seal Kit with Light. Raychem E-100-L-A.

11. Glass Tape. Raychem GS-54.

B. Pipe Markers: Furnish pipe markers with the words “ELECTRIC TRACED”

printed with UV-stable black ink on a durable yellow background. Meet the

requirements of the ASME (ANSI) A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping

Systems and also Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping” Attachment 1,

“Identification of Piping Systems.” Provide materials and styles that are suitable

for outdoor environments.

C. Piping: See Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping,” and Section 40 24 10, “Chemical

Piping.”

D. Insulation: See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating cables for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance.

1. Surfaces to receive heat tracing shall be cleaned of all dirt, oil, scale, rust,

and other foreign matter, and shall be dry and free of frost during

installation of heat trace cable.

2. Ensure surfaces and pipe in contact with electric heating cables are free of

burrs and sharp protrusions.

B. Heat tracing cabling shall fit within the piping insulation as shown on the

Drawings and as described in Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment

Insulation.”

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 306 of 315


40 41 00 – 4

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Heat trace piping and hoses in accordance with individual pipe sections

listed in Paragraph 3.5 of Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping,”

Section 40 24 10, “Chemical Piping,” the Drawings, and

TFC-ENG-STD-02.

2. Install electric heating cable according to the manufacturer’s instructions,

and in accordance with NECA 202.

3. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before

insulation is installed.

4. Wrap ratio for hoses shall be 1.3.

5. For hoses and for pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated pipe spools 5 ft

of extra heating cable shall extend on each side of every hose or pipe

spool. Coil extra heating cables and protect during shipping.

6. During field installation of pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated pipe

spools, wrap flanges on both ends with extra heat trace wire as provided.

Trim extra length and splice each connection with splice kit strapped to

the pipe in close proximity to the flanges.

7. Install heater cable to allow easy removal on maintenance items such as

pumps, valves, strainers, or filters.

8. Waterproof all terminations and electrical connections.

9. Attach heater cable directly to the pipe using the heating cable

manufacturer’s adhesive backed glass fiber tape at 1-ft intervals.

10. Connect wiring in accordance with the Drawings and Section 26 05 19,

“Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”

11. Ground equipment in accordance with the Drawings and Section 26 05 26,

“Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

12. Notify Buyer after heat trace cabling has been applied, and prior to

backfilling or installing insulation on the piping (with the exception of

pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated pipe spools). Obtain approval

from Buyer prior to beginning backfill or covering piping.

13. Perform examination on connection of heat tracing before application of

insulation and jacketing over joints and other materials and components.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 307 of 315


40 41 00 – 5

14. Install insulation over piping or hoses with electric heating cables in

accordance with Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment

Insulation.”

15. Install signs at maximum 20-ft intervals along pipe insulation reading:

“ELECTRIC TRACED.” Install labels so they will be visible during

normal operations.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform tests after cable installation but before application of insulation or

covering, with the exception of pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated

pipe spools (see next line).

2. Heat-traced hoses and Pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated pipe spools

shall be tested and show compliance before shipping.

3. Test cable for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before

energizing.

4. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure

voltage and current simultaneously.

B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying

thermal insulation on pipe mounted cables.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Remove and replace damaged heat trace cables.

F. Protect installed heat trace cables from damage during construction and

transportation.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 308 of 315


40 42 00 – 1

SECTION 40 42 00

PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Installation of above and below grade insulation and jacketing systems.








ASME NQA-1, 2008 with 2009 Addenda Quality Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Facility Applications


ASTM C534 Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible

Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet

and Tubular Form

ASTM C547 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe

Insulation

ASTM C795 Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for

Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. None.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 309 of 315


40 42 00 – 2


1. Certificate of Conformance: With delivery, submit a legible certificate

stating that the insulation materials meet the requirements of the Drawings

and this Section.


A. Misrepresented Products: See the Statement of Work or required measures to


B. Documents and records for the insulation jacket examinations as described in

3.4.B.1 shall be delivered to Construction Document Control in accordance with

the Contract Statement of Work.

1.5 PERMITS




B. Deliver insulation and associated adhesives to site in manufacturer’s containers

with manufacturer’s stamp or label clearly shown.

C. Protect insulation and associated components against dirt, water, and chemical

damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES

A. See the Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Inside Piping Insulation System:

1. Armaflex NH flexible expanded closed-cell elastomeric thermal insulation

in accordance with ASTM C534 Grade 1. Thermal conductivity of 0.27

BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F at 75°F. Insulation thickness shall be in accordance with

Table 1.

a. Products that come in contact with Stainless Steel pressurized pipe

shall be in accordance with ASTM C795.

2. Outer covering: Fiberglass fabric impregnated with silicone rubber (min

temp resistance 500° F), secured with Hook and Loop fasteners or similar

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 310 of 315


40 42 00 – 3

(do not use aluminum wire) according to manufacturer’s specifications.

All horizontal joints to be on the bottom.

3. Flashing compound: Non-shrinking, flexible, clear, 94% non-volatile, for

service temperatures of -30°F through 250°F, RTV silicone.

B. Pre-fabricated Heat-traced and Insulated Pipe Spools:




Table 1.



2. Pipe Spool Outer covering: Stainless Steel roll jacketing in compliance

with ASTM C1767 at least 0.016” thick with a 3 mil integrally bonded

moisture retarder over the surface for contact with the insulation (ITW

Insulation Systems, or equivalent).



C. Outside Above Grade Piping, Hoses, and Pipe Spool Field Joints Insulation

System:




Table 1.



2. Armaflex WB water-based latex enamel insulation coating.

3. Field Piping Outer Covering: Fiberglass fabric impregnated with silicone

rubber (min temp resistance 350° F), color to be white, secured with Hook

and Loop fasteners or similar (do not use aluminum wire) according to

manufacturer’s specifications.



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 311 of 315


40 42 00 – 4

D. Below Grade Pipe Insulation System:

1. Insulation shall be Foamglas insulation, ASTM C 552, “Specification for

Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation,” by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.

Thermal conductivity of 0.28 BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F at 50°F. Insulation

thickness shall be in accordance with Table 1.



2. The pipe and fittings outer covering insulation jacket shall be

PITTWRAP®46

SS jacketing (FI-179A) with sealant PITTSEAL®46

727

(FI-255) by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.

3. Oversized insulation shall be at least 2” thick, of the same material as

described in 2.2.D.1 above, per Pittsburgh Corning Corporation

specifications and as detailed on the Drawings.

4. Support blocks within oversized insulation shall be procured/fabricated as

specified in Pittsburgh Corning Corporation specifications and as detailed

on the Drawings.

2.3 MATERIAL QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Products shall be obtained from qualified suppliers, or be commercial grade items

(CGIs) meeting acceptance criteria specified in this Section. Commercial grade

dedication will be performed by Buyer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surfaces to receive insulation shall be cleaned of all dirt, oil, scale, rust, and

foreign matter, and shall be dry and free of frost during application of insulation.

B. Verify that examination and leak/pressure testing of line or pipe spools have been

completed, and installation of heat tracing has been completed, as applicable.

C. Verify that insulation is configured to accommodate the heat trace as shown on

the Drawings.

D. All standing water shall be removed from underground trenches prior to installing

insulation.

46

PITTWRAP and PITTSEAL are registered trademarks of Pittsburgh Corning Corporation, Pittsburgh,

Pennsylvania.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 312 of 315


40 42 00 – 5

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. The adhesives of self-adhesive labels, tape, and marking materials used for

temporary marking of Stainless Steel shall contain less than 210 ppm total

halogens (free and chemically combined).

2. Warning tape should be applied on piping insulation where piping is

equipped with electric heating cables.

B. Cracked or broken insulation shall be replaced or repaired as required in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Inspect to be certain there are no

openings or pinholes in the jacketing.

C. Apply insulation over welds after weld examination and satisfactory leak testing,

and after application of epoxy coating.

D. Heat Tracing: Ensure heat trace is installed as specified on the Drawings and per

Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”

E. Insulation shall be applied over the electrical heat tracing and secured using glass

fiber reinforced tape. Pipe insulation shall accommodate the heat trace cable

shown on Drawings.

F. Pre-fabricated Heat-traced and Insulated Pipe Spools for Above Grade Piping

Runs as Specified on the Drawings

1. Install insulation and roll covering. Maintain a 6” setback to all flange

locations.

2. Fill voids inside pipe covering protection saddle with insulation.

3. Install Stainless Steel roll jacketing over insulation with minimum

overlaps per manufacturer’s instructions. Seam to be located on the

bottom. Install directly over pipe covering protection saddles. Use

Stainless Steel banding, installation and spacing per manufacturer’s

specifications. Also locate banding at both edges of every pipe covering

protection saddle.

4. Permanently mark all the way around jacketing, with paint or otherwise,

the center location of each pipe covering protection saddle that is hidden

directly below the roll jacketing.

5. Install two piece Stainless Steel jacketing elbows with minimum overlaps

and banding per manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Seal all gaps to be watertight.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 313 of 315


40 42 00 – 6

G. Above Grade Field Piping Insulation System

1. Install insulation over joints only after NDE and leak/pressure testing of

line has been completed.

2. After heat trace and heat trace splice kit installation, and before insulation,

all field joints and below grade to above grade transitions are to be

wrapped with petrolatum, composite, or wax adhesive sealing tape,

installed per manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Insulate valves using removable insulation pads, and any fittings not

accommodated with straight jacketed pipe insulation.

4. Coat insulation with Armaflex WB finish per manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Install fiberglass fabric outer coating over Armaflex WB finish. Overlap

distance of the fibergrlass fabric installed over flanged joints or valves

shall be at least 2 inches over the edge of the pipe spool Stainless Steel roll

jacketing. All horizontal joints to be on the bottom. Cut jacketing to fit

tightly around heat trace splice kit protrusions.

6. Seal jacketing and any protrusions with flashing compound so as to be

watertight.

H. Hose Insulation System

1. Install Armaflex insulation, covered with silicon impregnated fiberglass

fabric.

I. Below Grade Piping Insulation System

1. Install insulation and jacketing per the manufacturer’s instructions.

Ensure that the all joints and seams are properly sealed.

2. Verify piping is supported, anchored, and guided as specified in the

manufacturer’s instructions and on the Drawings.

3. Backfill insulation in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and

the Drawings.

4. Expansion loops, piping supports, and fill in the bends and expansion

loops shall be as specified in the manufacturer’s instructions and on the

Drawings.

J. Transition from Below Grade to Above Grade Piping Insulation

1. Extend below grade insulation and PITTWRAP jacketing with PITTSEAL

a minimum of 4” above grade.

2. Overlap with above grade fiberglass fabric covering down to within 1” of

grade.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 314 of 315


40 42 00 – 7

3.3 INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Piping and Hose Insulation Schedule:

Table 1. Piping

(see corresponding

Section) Location

Design

Temperature

Minimum

Required

Insulation

Thickness

Insulation Purpose

“Hot Water” Inside See Section

40 05 13,

“Process

Piping,”

Paragraph 3.5

3/8” Incidental Human

Contact

“Cold Water” Below Grade 1.5” Freeze Protection

“Cold Water” Above Grade 1”

“Hot Water” Below Grade 1.5” Freeze Protection &

Maintain Process

Temperature “Hot Water” Above Grade 1”

Chemical Piping Below Grade See Section

40 24 10,

“Chemical

Piping”

1.5” Freeze Protection &

Maintain Process

Temperature Chemical Piping Above Grade 2”


A. Cleaning


wiping, or other mechanical method approved by the Buyer until there is

no visible dirt, scale, or debris.

B. Examinations

1. Insulation Jacket: Visually examine all laps, seams, and field applied

coated areas to ensure that these areas are sealed from water entry in

accordance with this Specification and product data sheets.


END OF SPECIFICATION

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.04 3/30/2017 - 8:14 AM 315 of 315